La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Aplicacions
+
+
Abans de veure totes les aplicacions que venen amb el Haiku, donen un cop d'ull a cm s'instal·len i es desinstal·len els programes que us heu bauxat d'on sigui, per exemple d'un lloc citat a la pàgina de Benvinguda.
+
Només hauríeu d'extreure/instal·lar arxius dins del Haiku. Si extraieu un paquet al Linux o al Windows, per exemple, i després tan sols copieu la carpeta al Haiku, es perden totes els atributs vitals atributs, ja que aquests sistemes operatius normalment no gestionen metadades.
Haiku software always comes as an archive. Most of the time it's a ZIP, some old BeOS packages come in Software Valet's PKG format. Software Valet was able to automatically execute installation scripts, so after double-clicking you just select a destination folder and everything's taken care of.
+If it's a ZIP archive, double-clicking opens Expander where you also set the destination and unpack it. As explained in the topic Filesystem layout, that destination is either
+
+
/boot/common/apps/
per les aplicacions disponibles per a tots els usuaris
+
/boot/home/apps/
per les aplicacions disponibles per a un usuari
+
+
This distinction will only become relevant once Haiku gets multi-user support, of course.
+
Once the archive is unpacked, you should have a look into the newly created folder. Often you find ReadMe files or other documentation of interest.
+
Some programs need further configurations. For example, Tracker Add-Ons, Translators or other system enhancing components have to be put into the right folders. Either you'll find a little script file (often with the suffix .sh) like install that you simply double click to have all taken care of.
+Sometimes you'll find folders that link to the correct destination named "drag [filename] here...". So, you simply follow that instruction and you're done.
+
Most of the time, however, nothing of the sort is necessary and you're done after unpacking.
+Topics Deskbar or LaunchBox describe how to add shortcuts to your newly installed application.
If the installation was done with an install script, chances are, there's an uninstall script as well. In that case, double-click it and you're done.
+Otherwise, uninstalling is simply done by deleting the application's folder.
+
This, of course, leaves back possible configuration files in your ~/config/settings folder. This may be on purpose, if you want to keep those settings in case you'll install the program again in the future. Also, when the installation involved those "drag [filename] here..." folders, those files are also left behind.
+
One method to quickly get to all the app's files is to do a quick query for a significant part of the application's name. This will reveal the app's binary, its installation folder and its settings as well as possible links in the Deskbar etc. Simply select all relevant files and delete them.
Haiku comes with a set of mostly small but essential applications. You'll find all of them at /boot/system/apps/ or /boot/common/apps/. Applications that are not usually launched by a double-click on a data file (e.g. ShowImage for image files) can be found in the Applications menu of the Deskbar.
Besides the normal commandline tools coming with the bash shell or are necessary to be POSIX compliant, there are a few Haiku-specific commandline applications worth mentioning. These commands are often useful for scripting purposes, see also topic Bash and Scripting.
Besides the above listed programs, which are all maintained by the Haiku project, there are a few essential applications bundled in a standard Haiku system. Bugs and feature requests for those have to be filed with the particular maintainer.
El Monitor d'Activitat permet fer un seguiment dels recursos del sistema i altres punts interessants.
+
+
Podeu mostrar i amagar tota mena de recursos del sistema, clicant amb el botó dret a la finestra:
+Memòria usada/Cau, Espai d'Intercanvi, Ús de la CPU, Dades rebudes/Enviades, Falles de Pàgina, Semàfors, Ports, Fils, Equips, Aplicacions en execució, Mida del Text/Raw del Portapapers, Nodes dels Media.
+
Sota el gràfic hi ha una llegenda (que es pot amagar des del menú contextual). Podeu canviar els colors del gràfic i el fons arrossegant i enganxant des de qualsevol gestor de color, com ara Icon-O-Matic.
+
Podeu afegir més vistes des del menú Fitxer si està massa atapeït.
+
El menú Preferències obre un control que permet triar l'interval en que s'actualitzaran les dades.
+
Cada vista disposa d'unes nanses Replicadores que permeten moure'la, per exemple, a l'Escriptori.
BePDF és un visualitzador de PDF que arrenca ràpidament. A més de visualitzar, permet fer anotacions, i afegir punts de llibre als PDFs no encriptats. Actualment està totalment localitzat en 20 llengües i és fàcil afegir més llengües fent servir fitxers de text.
+
La documentació està disponible en format HTML o PDF. També la podeu orbir des del menú Ajuda | Mostra l'Ajuda....
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Gestor d'Arrencada
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Cap, normalment s'inicia des del menú Eines de l'Instal·lador
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/BootManager
+
Preferències:
cap les còpies de seguretat del MBR es desent per omisió a ~/config/settings/bootman/
+
+
+
Si no afegiu la partició Haiku a un gestor d'arrencada anterior cpm ara el GRUB, el Gestor d'Arrencada pot instal·lar un petit menú d'arrencada al Master Boot Record (MBR) que té un aspecte semblant al següent:
+
+
Boot Manager isn't yet tested very well and still has a few restrictions that it will complain about if they aren't met: the menu can only be installed on your first harddisk and there has to be a 2KiB space after the Master Boot Record (MBR).
+
El Gestor d'Arrencada us guiarà en el procés d'instal·lació del menú d'arrencada.
The BootManager starts off with a list of all available drives from which you choose the destination. If there's already a boot menu on that drive, the Uninstall button becomes active, leading you through the simple procedure to restore a formerly backed-up MBR, thereby removing the boot menu again.
+Otherwise, choose Install to continue.
In case anything goes wrong or you want to remove the boot menu again, the Master Boot Record (MBR) is now saved. This is obviously a very important step, make sure you don't accidentally overwrite some other MBR-backup maybe from some earlier experimentation, for example!
+
+
+
Just select a destination for the backup file "MBR" or leave the default path. After clicking Next you'll get a confirmation if the backup was successful.
Next you're presented with a list of all partitions on the destination drive. By setting checkmarks you decide what entries will appear in the boot menu, the text boxes allow you to rename an entry.
+
After that, you pick from the pop-up menu which partition will be booted from by default and set a timeout with the slider below. Here, "Immediately" will skip the boot menu entirely, "Never" will just stop at the boot menu. You can override the timeout setting by holding ALT while booting.
Before the boot menu is written to the MBR, you'll get a summary of your configuration and then one last chance to abort the operation. Don't worry though, as long as you keep the MBR backup safe, you can easily revert the changes. Should things get thoroughly messed up, you can always boot from a Haiku install CD or USB stick and write back the MBR backup with BootManager.
~/cd/* - Conserva els detalls de tots els CDs coneguts
+
+
+
+
+
+
L'ús és força semblant al que es podria esperar observant els seus botons.
+Activeu el botó Repeteix a l'esquerra del botó A l'atzar per reproduïr tot el CD.
+
Si us cal més control com ara llistes de reproducció, proveu millor el MediaPlayer.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
CharacterMap
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/CharacterMap
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings
+
+
+
CharacterMap mostra el codi UTF-8 de cada caràcter d'un tipus de lletra.
+
+
To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also Show private blocks from the View menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the Font menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.
+
You can drag&drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either Copy character (ALTC) or Copy as escaped byte string (SHIFTALTC). Resulting in, e.g. either € or \xe2\x82\xac.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Haiku-specific commandline applications
+
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
+
+
+
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in either /boot/system/bin or /boot/common/bin. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps should go in ~/config/bin. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
+The following isn't an exhaustive list of all Haiku-specific CLI apps, it serves just to highlight a few of the most useful to give you a taste. Feel encouraged to explore what's in the bin/ folders on your own a bit. Executing an app with the parameter --help shows the usage of the command and all its various options.
These commands are used to display, read out, add and remove attributes of files. Remember that these meta data are currently only available on BFS formatted volumes. Moving files onto other file systems will strip all attributes!
+All these commands are described in topic Attributes in Terminal.
With these commands you list, make, reindex and remove attributes to BFS' index. Every volume has it's own index, remember that when copying files from one volume to another.
+These commands are described in topic Index.
Here are a few commandline tools that are especially useful for scripting (see also topic Bash and Scripting).
+
+
alert
+
alert conjures up the typical alert window with a pre-defined icon, explanatory text and up to three buttons. It will return the title of the pressed button and an exit status (starting with 0). For example, this is made of the line:
+
alert --idea "FantasticApp(tm) installed successfully!
+Would you like a link to it?" "On Desktop" "In Deskbar" "No thanks"
+
+
+
filepanel
+
filepanel displays a load or save file panel and lets the user choose a file or location. As a return value you'll get the chosen file or folder's path. There are several parameters available, for example to set a starting directory, a window title, a default name when saving or restrictions to the allowed types of files. This is an example of
+
filepanel -s -t "Save your logfile" -d ~/config/settings -n Fantastic.log
+
+
+
waitfor
+
waitfor is a nice way to wait for a particular application or thread to be started or to have ended.
+
+
query
+
query is the commandline version of the Find panel. In fact, a quick way to generate the search term is to build a query in the Find panel, switch to by formula, add double quotes (") in front and back and paste the whole string after your query command in Terminal or your script.
checkfs is an important tool to check for errors in your file system. Simply add the volume or device name and it'll run through every file and correct inconsistencies where possible.
+
+
desklink
+
desklink can install an icon for any file, folder, query or application in the Deskbar tray. It also offers the option to provide a context menu when right-clicking an icon to execute special actions. As an example, try this to add the commandline app screenshot with various options (the "\" in the first line is just for the line break in Terminal):
diskimage lets you register a regular file as disk device. For example, you can register a Haiku anyboot image, mount it in Tracker and copy, edit or remove files there before using it as source in the Installer.
+
+
open
+
open is a very handy little tool. With it you open any file with its preferred application, or start a specific application by its signature without the need to know its exact path. It also works with URLs and even with the "virtual" directories . for the current directory and .. for the parent, opening the folder in Tracker.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
CodyCam
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/CodyCam
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/codycam
+
+
+
Amb CodyCam podeu capturar imatges a intervals prefixats amb una webcam o qualsevol dispositiu d'entrada de vídeo connectat i desar-les amb FTP.
+
+
To the left under the preview, you set the filename that'll be suffixed with an increasing number for every picture taken. Beneath that you decide on the file format and the rate the pictures are taken.
+
To the right you choose either FTP or sFTP (if SSH is available) and enter the needed data to save the images on a server.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Calculadora
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/DeskCalc
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/DeskCalc_settings
+
+
+
DeskCalc is a simple calculator that nevertheless has some nice features that aren't apparent on first sight.
+
+
+
DeskCalc understands much more than its simple keypad suggests.
+Besides the operators , -, *, /, %, ^ and the constants pi and e the following math functions are supported:
+!, acos, asin, atan, atan2, cbrt, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
+
+
Right-clicking offers these options:
+
+
Enable Num Lock on start up
Automatically activates the number block when launching DeskCalc.
+
Radiants/Degrees
Switch between "rad" and "deg" as unit for angular measure.
+
Compact
ALT0
A minimal view mode that hides the keypad.
+
Basic
ALT1
The standard look of DeskCalc.
+
Scientific
ALT2
Show additional buttons for advanced calculations.
+
+
When it comes to user input, DeskCalc is quite tolerant:
+/, :, \ are all interpreted as division operators,
+*, x are valid symbols for multiplication.
+Also, be aware that . and , are both considered floating points, which means you mustn't use them as 1000-separators.
+
You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as Replicant onto the Desktop via drag&drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure Show replicants is activated in the Deskbar.
+
The keypad can be colored with a drag&drop from any color well, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
+
You can move up and down in a history of past calculations with ↑ and ↓.
+
You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag&drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.
+
Even better, the reverse is also possible:
+Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag & dropping them back into DeskCalc.
+Or you drag&drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.
+
DeskCalc can be used in Terminal. Just put the expression in double quotes, like this:
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
DiskProbe
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/DiskProbe
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/DiskProbe_data
+
+
+
DiskProbe is a HEX editor to view and alter data of a file or on a device on a byte-level. It's a very low-level tool and has therefore the potential to really mess things up if you're not careful!
+
Always work with the backup of a file and be extra careful when working directly on a device.
+
When starting DiskProbe you'll first be asked for the file or the device to work on. After that you are presented with this interface:
+
+
The main view shows always one block of data, the size of which can be adjusted with View | BlockSize. To the left is the offset to the start of the block, in the middle the data as HEX values and to the right the same as ASCII symbols.
+You can move from block to block with the slider above or with ALT← and ALT→ and switch between the HEX and ASCII columns with TAB.
+
Block | Selection will not only show the selection with different endianess (and in HEX or decimal, set by View | Base), it will also interprete the selection as a block offset that you can jump to. It will be grayed out if the position is outside of the file/device.
+This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often contain pointers to other blocks.
+
If the file you're probing includes attributes, the Attributes menu can be used to open any of them in a new DiskProbe window. Here's the copyright attribute of the AboutSystem application:
+
+
Depending on the kind of attribute, you'll get a different editor tab besides the always present Raw Editor. For example, there are editors for strings and MIME types or an icon viewer for the vectoricon attribute.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
DiskUsage
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/DiskUsage
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/DiskUsage
+
+
+
DiskUsage shows graphically how the space on your volumes is utilized.
+A useful tool to answer the question, "Where has all my disk space gone?".
+
After launching, DiskUsage shows only a white window with all mounted volumes as tabs at the top. You'll have to choose the one you're interested in and click Scan to start chugging through the disk. For larger disks this can take some time... While you wait, you may switch to a different tab and start exploring that volume or begin the scan process there as well.
+It's not recommended to start several concurrent scan processes on the same physical disk, as the constant repositioning of the heads of the drive will only extend the wait.
+
+
The concentric circles represent different levels in the file system hierarchy. Above, the circle in the center represents the /boot/home/ folder. Each segment of the ring immediately outside that circle is a file or folder under /boot/home/. Every segment farther outside brings you one level deeper in the file hierarchy. You may have to resize the window to accommodate very deep folders.
+
+
If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display.
+
The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file.
+
DiskUsage ignores symbolic links.
+
+
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
+
Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to Get info, Open (with Tracker), Open with another suitable application or Rescan that particular folder.
+Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
+Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
+
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
+
You can also use the Tracker add-on from the context menu of any folder to start DiskUsage with that particular location.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
DriveSetup
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/DriveSetup
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/DriveSetup
+
+
+
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and initialize partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+
+
At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Besides a maximum of 4 primary partitions, each of those can contain a number of extended/logical partitions. You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
+
You can select a partition from the list and mount and unmount them with the commands in the Partition menu or by pressing ALTM or ALTU.
+
You can also completely delete a partition with Partition | Delete.
+Which brings us to this:
+
Dealing with creating/deleting/initializing partitions is very dangerous business. Always check twice to be sure you're working with the right one and always keep an up-to-date backup of your data in case something goes wrong!
If you plan to use the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you can skip the creation of a partition and proceed right to Initializing.
+
When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <empty>, you can create a new partition in this space with Partition | Create...(ALTC).
+
+
You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose Be File System if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
+
If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an Active partition checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
+
Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be initialized with a filesystem.
Only unmounted partitions can be initialized by using the Partition | Initialize menu.
+
+
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
+Initializing will destroy all data on that partition!
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Expander
+
+
Barra d'eines:
No entry, normally launched via double-clicking a supported file.
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
+
+
+
Expander is a small tool to quickly unpack the most common archives, among them zip, gzip, bzip2, rar and tar.gz.
+Just double-click an archive to see this simple interface:
+
+
+
Orígen
ALTO
will open a file dialog to find an archive to unpack.
+
Destí
ALTD
will open a file dialog to set the destination.
+
Extreu
ALTE
will start the unpacking. It can be aborted with ALTK.
+
+
You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking Show contents or pressing ALTL.
+
Expander can only unpack whole archives.
+You can't select individual files to expand or add/remove files from the archive.
+
Settings | Settings... or ALTS opens a preference panel that offers some useful settings to adjust Expander's behavior.
+The options are all self-explanatory:
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
+Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
+
+
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
+
+
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
+
+
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
+
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType add-on on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
+
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
+
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
+For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
+
+
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
+
+
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure the path is selected in the path list.
+
+
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
+
+
+
To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click&drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
+
To move a point, simply click&drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
+
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move point(s)
+
Insert point
+
Add point
+
Delete point CTRL
+
Corner↔Bezier ALT
+
Select points SHIFT
+
+
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
+
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
+
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
+
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
+
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add rectangle and Add circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+
+
+
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
+
Clean up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
+
Rotate indices right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+
+
+
+
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move
+
Resize
+
Rotate
+
Move rotation point
+
+
+
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.
The Shape menu offers the before mentioned possibility to Add empty, with path/style/path & style and to Duplicate or Remove a shape. Then, there is:
+
+
Reset transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
+
Freeze transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
+If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
+
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
+
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+
+
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag&dropping it into the list of styles.
+
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag&drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
+
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+
File | Save as... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+
+
File | Export as... opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
+
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
+
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
+
HVIF source code
Saves as source code used by programmers
+
SVG
Saves as SVG
+
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
+
PNG set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
+
BEOS:ICON attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
+
META:ICON attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+
+
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
+
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click&drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click&drag while holding SPACE.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Installer
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/Installer
+
Preferències:
none
+
+
+
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
+Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
+
+
This is alpha-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
+
The Installer needs a prepared partition. You may have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool until Haiku's DriveSetup is mature enough to handle this task.
+
Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. How that is done exactly is available as an online guide.
+
+
+
Once you acknowledged with Continue, you're presented with the main window:
+
+
In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
+The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
+
Clicking the little expander widget will Show optional packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
+
You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on Setup partitions... to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
+
Begin starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the home/ and common/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the Onto: Please choose target menu and select Write boot sector from the Tools menu to make it bootable again.
+
The other item in the Tools menu is used to Set up a boot menu that puts a menu in the boot sector to choose what operating system to boot. See topic BootManager for more information.
+ You don't need to run the BootManager if you already use a bootmanager like GRUB, in which case you have to add Haiku manually (see above), or Haiku runs exclusively on your machine.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
List of all commandline applications
+
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
+
+
+
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in either /boot/system/bin or /boot/common/bin. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps should go in ~/config/bin. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
+Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each with only a short description of what it does, for more detailed information on its usage execute the command with the parameter --help.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Magnify
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/Magnify
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Magnify_prefs
+
+
+
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
+
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 32x32 pixel square around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
+
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
+You can move the red outline with ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
+They can also be moved with ← / → / ↑ / ↓. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
+
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with OPT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
Clicking on the pop-up menu gives you a number of options:
+
+
Save image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a resource file.
+
Copy image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
+
Hide/Show info
ALTT
Toggles the display of all the additional information.
+
Add a crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
+
Remove a crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
+
Hide/Show grid
ALTG
Toggles the overlayed grid.
+
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Stops/continues updating the magnification area.
+
Stick coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.
+
Make square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
+
Decrease window size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
+
Increase window size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
~/config/settings/Mail/
+~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links/ - Objects put here appear in the mailbox' context menu
+~/config/settings/Mail/signatures/ - Location to store signatures
+~/config/settings/Mail/status/ - Location to store custom statuses
+
+
+
Mail is Haiku's default viewer and editor of emails. It has nothing to do with the actual fetching and sending of mails, which is done by the mail_daemon and can be configured via the E-mail preferences.
+
This page is a general overview of the application Mail. For more information how email in Haiku works, refer to the Workshop on managing email.
You double-click an email file to open it in Mail. The interface is quite simple:
+
+
A menu and optional tool bar on top, with an area of the interesting attributes of a mail (to, from, subject, date) below that, and then the actual body of the mail. If the mail appears with strange characters or empty, try to change the Decoding from the pop-up menu.
+
If there are files attached to an email, they are listed at the end of the message. A right-click on one opens a context menu to Save attachment... or Open attachment. You can also drag & drop directly to the Desktop or another Tracker window.
+
Most of the menu and tool bar items are pretty self-explaining, so we'll concentrate just on the highlights.
+
+Fitxer
+
When you close the window of a new mail, its status is normally switched from "New" to "Read". But you can set other statuses as well, by choosing from the Close and... submenu. There you'll also find the option Set to... to create your own custom statuses, which are saved under ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
+
+Edita
+
Here you'll find an item to open Mail's Preferences... (see below) and a shortcut to manage your Accounts..., which will open the E-mail preference panel.
+
+Visualitza
+
You'll only seldomly need these two items, if at all:
+
+
Mostra la capçalera
ALTH
Shows the complete header of a mail, in case you need to track down the path of your mail, for example.
+
Show raw message
Displays a mail in its raw state, i.e. with all its control characters and without Mail's coloring of quotes or URLs, for example..
+
+
+Missatge
+
The different options to reply to a mail may need a bit of explanation.
+
+
Contesta
ALTR
The standard reply to the server that has sent the mail to you. NOTE: In case of a mailing list post, this normally replies back to the mailing list, not just the person that wrote the post!
+
Contesta al remitent
OPTALTR
This on the other hand, sends directly and only to the person listed in the "From" attribute.
+
Contesta a tothom
SHIFTALTR
Replies to the original sender plus all other (cc'ed) recipients of the original mail.
+
+
If you mark a passage in the email before replying to it, only the marked text will be quoted in your answering mail. A nice way to cut down on excessive quoting, which is frowned upon by pretty much everybody...
+
The items to Forward, Resend and Copy to new are again pretty self-explaining.
+
When you've opened an email from a Tracker or query result window, Previous message and Next message will move to the previous/next email in the list.
+
Save address collects all email addresses from the header and the actual email body in a submenu. Choosing an address will open the People application in order to complete and save the contact information.
+
+Consultes
+
This doesn't work yet, but is intended to hold queries that would show all mail related to the currently open mail, like all from the same sender or same subject/thread.
A new email is created by invoking the New mail message menu or the corresponding icon from the tool bar of an open email. Or you just start the Mail application or choose Create new message... from the context menu of the mailbox icon in the Deskbar.
+
+
The window is pretty similar to the one when reading mails. The menu and tool bar items are slightly different and the text boxes have to be filled with the recipient's email address, subject and so on, of course.
+
Cc is short for the anachronistic term "carbon copy" and results in copies of your mail being sent to the listed people. The difference to just listing a buch of addresses in the "To" field is, that you don't directly address the cc'ed people, thereby signaling that you probably don't expect an answer of them.
+Bcc means "blind carbon copy" which does practically the same as "Cc", but hides the recipients from each other.
+
You can enter several recipients by separating their addresses with a comma.
+To, CC, and BCC are pop-up menus. They contain all email addresses on your system found by a query for People files. Their "Group" attribute will sort them in corresponding submenus.
+
Again, we'll focus on the more interesting features in the menus.
+
+Fitxer
+
With Save as draft you can store your work so far and come back to it later. To load it again, choose it from the Open draft submenu that will list the result of a query for all mails with the status "Draft".
+
+Edita
+
Quote and Remove quote or their respective shortcuts ALT← / → are used to add/remove a level of quoting by adjusting the number of ">" symbols in front of quoted lines. Just select some text in all the lines you want un/quoted and invoke the menu item.
+
+
+
+
Check spelling currently only offers corrections of English texts by marking wrong or unknown words red and showing them in italic.
+Right-clicking such a word opens a context menu offering suggestions to correct the word or to Add it to the accepted vocabulary.
+
Then, there are again the items to open Mail's Preferences... (see below) and a shortcut to managing your Accounts..., which will open the E-mail preference panel.
+
+Missatge
+
With Add signature you can add predefined texts to the end of your mail. From its submenu you can choose a specific or Random one.
+
+
+
+
You create new or edit existing signatures with Edit signatures..., which will open a window where you enter the text itself and the title of your new sig. There, in the Signature menu, you find items to Open a specific signature or Save or Delete the currently loaded one, Signatures should be saved in ~/config/settings/Mail/signatures.
+
Use Add enclosure... and Remove enclosure to add/remove files as attachments. You can also drag & drop files from a Tracker window. Be careful though to drop those in the header section (To/From/Subject area at the top) or they'll get pasted into the email body if they are text files.
+
+
+
+
File attachments are listed below the header section. You can remove a file by invoking a context menu or by selecting it and pressing DEL.
+
+
+Consultes
+
This doesn't work yet, but is intended to hold queries that would show all mail related to the currently open mail, like all to the same recipient or same subject/thread.
Options to show labels under the icons or hide the tool bar completely.
+
Tipus de lletra
Sets the type of font used for the email text.
+
Mida
Sets the font size.
+
Colored quotes
Colors different levels of quotation.
+
Initial spell check mode
Turns the spell checker on/off on startup.
+
Automatically mark mail as read
If you close an email with the Status "New", you can have it automatically marked as "Read".
+
+
+
+Mailing
+
+
Default account
If you have several email accounts, this specifies which to use by default when creating a new message.
+
Reply account
When you reply to a mail, you can either always Use default account set in the pop-up menu above, or use the Account from mail, which will send the mail from the same account that received the original message.
+
Reply preamble
This is inserted before the quoted text in your reply. You can use various variables from the pop-up menu next to the text field. Example: "Hello %n!\n\nOn %d you wrote:\n" produces this:
+
Hello Dr. Hawking!
+
+On Mon, 18 Jan 1998 02:55:16 +0800 you wrote:
+> so thanks again for the inspiration concerning the cosmological constant.
+> ...and the rest of the quoted text following...
+
Auto signature
Adds a signature automatically to the end of the mail.
+
Encoding
Sets the default encoding.
+
Warn unencodable
If your mail contains characters that can't be encoded with the currently set encoding method, you can turn on being warned about that. That gives you the opportunity to change the encoding before sending. Otherwise unencodable characters are replaced by rectangle symbols.
+
Text wrapping
Inserts line-breaks every 76 characters which makes mails easier to read.
+
Attach attributes
You can choose to send BFS' attributes of a file alongside the attachments. This is nice for other Haiku users, as they'll get a "complete" file (think artist, album, title attributes of MP3 files), but may cause confusion (or even suspicion) with others, who will wonder what the additional "BeOS Attributes" attachment might be...
+Should you opt not to send attributes with your attachments, remember zip up your files before you send them or you'll strip away BFS attributes.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
MediaPlayer
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/MediaPlayer
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/MediaPlayer
+
+
+
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
+
The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
+Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
+
+
Audio and video playback
+
Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
+
Available to all media is the File info... (ALTI). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
+
Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+Under Video you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default Stream settings should work best for correctly encoded files.
+
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under Subtitles, their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the Audio track submenu. The Video | Track submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
+
You can toggle the Full screen mode (ALTENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with Hide interface (ALTH or a double right-click) or have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
+
+
Playlists
+
MediaPlayer | Playlist... (ALTP) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
+
You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the Edit menu you can Randomize or Remove (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with Move to Trash (ALTT).
+
Of course, you can Save a playlist and later Open it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
+
+
Settings
+
There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
+
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+
Next are different View options.
+You can opt to Use hardware overlay if available, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
+You can Scale movies smoothly (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
+Scale controls in full-screen mode if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
+Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of window, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
+
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at Full volume, at less confusing Low volume or quietly Muted.
+
+
Keyboard controls
+
MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+
+
Z
Skip to previous track
+
X
Play
+
C
Pause
+
V
Stop
+
B
Skip to next track
+
+
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+
+
→
Seek forwards
+
SHIFT→
Jump forwards 10 seconds
+
ALT→
Jump forwards 30 seconds
+
←
Seek backwards
+
SHIFT←
Jump backwards 10 seconds
+
ALT←
Jump backwards 30 seconds
+
+
↑
Increase volume
+
↓
Decrease volume
+
+
ALT↑
Skip to previous Track
+
ALT↓
Skip to next Track
+
+
Spacebar
Toggle play/pause
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area)
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
MidiPlayer
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/MidiPlayer
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/MidiPlayerSettings
+
+
+
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback midi music files. Midi files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
+While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
+
Haiku doesn't come with a SoundFont installed, because they are so large and only few people generally need one. Most of those who do, already have high quality or custom SoundFonts. To be able to at least hear something you can install a free one from an optional package. In Terminal, enter: installoptionalpackage TimGMSoundFont
+
To use any other SoundFont, create a link to it in /boot/system/data/synth and name it big_synth.sy.
+
+
MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the Reverb pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
PackageInstaller
+
+
Barra d'eines:
No entry, normally launched via
+double-clicking a supported file.
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/PackageInstaller
+
Preferències:
none
+
+
+
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
+
PackageInstaller is a software installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
+
It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
+
The main window gives access to two configurations:
+
+
installation type (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option)
+
Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths)
+
+
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
+
At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
+
When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Pe
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/apps/Pe/Pe
+
Documentació:
/boot/apps/Pe/Documentation.html
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/pe/*
+
+
+
Pe is a sophisticated editor, with its syntax highlighting targeted mainly at programmers and HTML writers. Originally created by Maarten Hekkelmann, it's been open sourced and maintained by Haiku developers. A bugtracker and more information is available at the Pe project page.
+
Find out more about Pe's features in its local documentation.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
People
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/People
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/People_data
+
+
+
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+
+
+
+
The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+
+
These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+
+
+
+
You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALTE) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFTTAB will jump from column to column.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
PoorMan
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/PoorMan
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/PoorMan Settings
+
+
+
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremly easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
+
Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the Default, a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
+
PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with Edit | Settings...:
+
+
+
The settings panel is divided into three tabs:
+
In Site you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
+Logging lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
+The Advanced tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
+
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+
+
If you want to try out if PoorMan's working, choose /boot/apps/BePDF/docs/ as folder and index.html as start page. Then point your browser to the URL 127.0.0.1, which is your local host.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Screenshot
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/Screenshot
+/bin/screenshot
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/screenshot
+
+
+
Screenshots are taken by either starting the Screenshot application or by pressing the PRINT key,
+
+
In the Screenshot panel you can toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window and decide if the window border and mouse pointer should be included. You can also enter a delay before a screenshot is taken.
+
Below that you set the name, format and location for the screenshot that will be used when you click Save. Instead of saving the file to disk you can also decide to Copy to clipboard to be able to paste the shot directly into another application, or take a New screenshot.
+
All settings are remembered the next time you take a screenshot, enabling these convenient keyboard shortcuts:
+
+
PRINT
Takes a screenshot with zero delay and launches the Screenshot panel.
+
SHIFTPRINT
Takes a screenshot silently (without opening the panel), while still respecting the last used settings.
+
CTRLPRINT
Also takes a screenshot silently with the saved settings, but instead of saving it as a file, it's just copied to the clipboard.
+
+
+
+Taking a screenshot from Terminal
+
There's a special screenshot application to be used from Terminal or a script.
+screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
+
+
~> screenshot --help
+
+screenshot [OPTIONS] [FILE] Creates a bitmap of the current screen
+
+FILE is the optional output path / filename used in silent mode. An exisiting
+file with the same name will be overwritten without warning. If FILE is not
+given the screenshot will be saved to a file with the default filename in the
+user's home directory.
+
+OPTIONS
+ -m, --mouse-pointer Include the mouse pointer
+ -b, --border Include the window border
+ -w, --window Capture the active window instead of the entire screen
+ -d, --delay=seconds Take screenshot after the specified delay [in seconds]
+ -s, --silent Saves the screenshot without showing the application
+ window
+ -f, --format=image Give the image format you like to save as
+ [bmp], [gif], [jpg], [png], [ppm], [tga], [tif]
+ -c, --clipboard Copies the screenshot to the system clipboard without
+ showing the application window
+
+Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window
+
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
ShowImage
+
+
Barra d'eines:
No entry, normally launched via
+double-clicking a supported file.
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
+
+
+
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.
+ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
+
Viewing
+
+
The View menu offers to start a Slide show of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a Slide delay from 2 to 20 seconds.
+
Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
+Original size shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
+Fit to window shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
+Zoom in and Zoom out move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
+
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
+High quality zooming applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
+Stretch to window will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
+
Then there's a Full screen mode with an option to Show caption in full screen mode which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
+
Lastly, Show tool bar will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
+
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
+
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+
Browsing
+
+
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
+
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
+
Looking at the Browse menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like First page and Next page let you navigate those pages.
+
Editing
+
+
The Image menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
+
Use as backgroud... will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
+
Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to Selection mode from the Edit menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
+Clear selection or ESC will remove the selection box.
+
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
+
Saving and converting
+
To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal Save as... item from the File menu, select the format and choose a file name.
+Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+
+
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
+
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+
+
← / ↑
Previous image
+
→ / ↓
Next image
+
DEL
Move to Trash
+
+
Zoom in
+
-
Zoom out
+
0
Original size (100% zoom)
+
1
Fit to window
+
ALTENTER
Toggle full screen mode (also via doubleclick)
+
Control
While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
StyledEdit
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/StyledEdit
+
Preferències:
none
+
+
+
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
+
+
If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+ Int-32 4 "be:encoding"
+MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Int-32 4 "wrap"
+ Int-32 4 "alignment"
+ Raw Data 1048 "styles"
+
+1071 bytes total in attributes.
+
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
+
Because these attributes are a file system feature of BFS, this means that not only other platforms just see a plain text file, it also follows, that the formatting will be lost when a file is stored on a non-BFS partition. The above attributes are simply stripped and what's left is the ordinary, plain text file.
+
In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
+
Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the Font menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the Document menu only work on the whole file.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Terminal
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/Terminal
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Terminal
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/common/etc/inputrc
+
+
+
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
+
Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at Haiku's commandline applications. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with ALTT.
+
+
+
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
+By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
+Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
+
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
+
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
+
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
Settings | Settings... opens a panel to configure the standard settings of a Terminal.
+
+
+
It starts off with the "formulas" for naming tab and window titles. Again, tooltips show the available variables. Below that you set font type, font size and the different text and background colors. You can choose a pre-defined color schema like Black on white or White on black or create a Custom one using the color picker below.
+Activate the checkbox to Confirm exit if active programs exist and you'll be warned when trying to close a Terminal window while an app is still being executed.
+You can save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
+Pressing OK will save the current settings as default.
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/common/etc/.
+
+
.profile
+
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
+
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
The .inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
+
+
Insert path
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.
+
Change directory
Changes to the folder of the dragged file.
+
Create link here
Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Move here
Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Copy here
Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
+
You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
TextSearch
+
+
Barra d'eines:
No entry, normally launched via Tracker Add-on
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/TextSearch
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/TextSearch
+
+
+
TextSearch looks for a string in text files. Typically it is invoked from Tracker's Add-on context menu on the selection of files or folders you want to search.
+
+
+
+
You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit RETURN or click Search to start. If Show lines is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.
+
+
Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:
+
+
Menú de Fitxer
+
New window
ALTN
Opens a new window where you can enter another string and search through the same files/folders.
+
+
Set target...
ALTF
Lets you choose a new set of files and folders to search through.
+
Menú d'accions
+
Trim selection
ALTT
Removes all entries from the list that are not currently selected.
+
Open selection
ALTO
Opens the currently selected files with their preferred application (same as a double-click). If it's a text editor supporting it (like Pe), you can jump to the exact line the search string was found.
+
Open files in Tracker
ALTK
Opens the location of the currently selected files in Tracker.
+
Copy text to clipboard
ALTB
Copies the current selection to the clipboard.
+
Menú de preferències
+
Skip folders starting with a dot
This is useful when working in a "unixy" environment, where often administrative files are hidden inside ".folders/". Source versioning systems like SVN and CVS are examples of applications using this and are also widely used in Haiku.
+
Escape search text
TextSearch uses the command line tool grep. For it, special characters like '"*\$?! and spaces have to be escaped with a \. Deactivating this setting means you have to do this yourself, but in exchange grants you the power of regular expressions.
+
Text files only
TextSearch is currently only useful for finding strings in plain text files. Deactivating this setting will have it look through any kind of file anyway.
+
Menú de l'històric
+
Contains recently used search strings.
+
Menú de codificació
+
Lets you choose different character encodings if needed.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Vision
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/apps/Vision{version}/Vision
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Vision/*
+
+
+
Vision is an IRC client originally developed for the BeOS. Documentation and a bug tracker are available at the Vision website.
+
You can find help from other Haiku users and developers on Haiku channels in various languages.
+The most frequented is the English speaking #haiku at irc.freenode.org.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
WebPositive
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files
+
+
+
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
+
+
WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
+Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
+Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
+At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
+
Settings
+
From the Window menu you can open a Settings panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
+
The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a Start page, what's used as a Search page, what Download folder is used for stuff you get from the net.
+Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
+Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
+Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
+
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
+
The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
+
Browsing
+
If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+
+
+
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
+
Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background.
+
From the View menu you can Zoom in and Zoom out of a page. There's also an option to Zoom text only, leaving all images with their original size.
+
If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
+
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
+Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
+
Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
+
Edit | Find shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
+
After a while you may experience web pages being loaded slower and slower. Not really a bug in the truest sense, it's more an effect of a deficient handling of cookies. Either way, until that is fixed you'll have to manually intervene: Have a look at ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Cookies.curl. This file stores cookies from webpages and slowly grows while surfing the web. Once it's a few dozen kilobytes in size, it starts to slow down browsing. Just delete the file at that point to start with a clean slate.
+
Bookmarks
+
WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with Manage Bookmarks....
+
+
You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's Attributes menu, then select a file, press ALTE and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB. You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
+
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
+Activating Type-ahead filtering in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
+
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's Bookmarks menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
+
Downloads
+
Window | Downloads opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
+
Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you Cancel and Restart a download, or Open the file, or Remove its entry from the list. The Remove missing and Remove finished buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
+
Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
+Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
+
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
+
Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
+
Keyboard shortcuts
+
Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
+
+
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
+
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
+
ALTN
Opens a new window.
+
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
+
ALTENTER
Toggles full screen mode.
+
ALTR or F5
Refreshes the current page.
+
ALTH
Opens the home page.
+
ALTD
Shows/hides the Downloads window.
+
ALTF
Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC).
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
WonderBrush
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Aplicacions
+
Ubicació:
/boot/apps/WonderBrush/WonderBrush
+
Documentació:
/boot/apps/WonderBrush/Documentation {language}
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/WonderBrush
+
+
+
WonderBrush is an editor for bitmap and vector graphics. Find more information and workshops at the YellowBites website and in the local documentation.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Atributs
+
+
Attributes are data fields that belong to a file but aren't part of that file, e.g. they are not computed into the file size and can be copied or changed without touching the file itself. The system uses these attributes to store e.g. file size, file type or date of the last modification. This is similar to other operating systems and their filesystems.
+
What's different is that you can add any kind of attribute to any file and display it or make it editable in a Tracker window. You just have to define the kind of attribute you want to add to a file type (e.g. string, integer or time) and give it a name and description.
+
The file itself doesn't even need any contents at all. Take a look at these People files for example:
+
+
+
As you can see, these are all 0-sized files with attached attributes, the E-mail attribute of "John Nox" being edited right in Tracker.
+
If you index these attributes, as People, Email or audio files are by default, they are also searchable with Haiku's fast query system.
Attributes are displayed quite similar to a database or spreadsheet. Using Tracker you can choose which attributes to display (columns) and sort file listings (rows) accordingly.
+
To do this, open a Tracker window, click on the Attributes menu, and select the attributes you want to display. Alternatively, simply right-click onto a column heading and mark the items in the context menu. You can rearrange the columns by a simple drag&drop of the column heading. Moving a column out of a window, is a fast way to get rid of columns you don't need.
+
Double-click on the line between two attributes in the heading to automatically resize a column to its optimal width.
+
Click on a column heading to toggle the sorting order from ascending to descending. You can establish a secondary sort order by pressing the SHIFT key while clicking on a column heading. You can sort your People files by company and within that order sort by contact name, for instance. See the above screenshot as an example. The secondary sort order is marked by a lighter colored indicator beside the heading.
+
Editing these attributes is as simple as renaming a file: Either click on an entry or press ALTE and move between the attributes with TAB and SHIFTTAB. ESC leaves the editing mode without applying the changes.
If you prefer to use the commandline or plan to work with many files using scripting, there are several commands for controlling attributes from Terminal.
listattr lists a file's attributes, but doesn't show the contents of the attributes.
+
usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]
+
Al nostre exemple de la captura anterior:
+
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
+File: Clara Botters
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Text 14 "META:name"
+ Text 6 "META:nickname"
+ Text 1 "META:company"
+
+ Text 18 "META:address"
+ Text 8 "META:city"
+ Text 1 "META:state"
+ Text 1 "META:zip"
+ Text 1 "META:country"
+
+ Text 1 "META:hphone"
+ Text 13 "META:wphone"
+ Text 1 "META:fax"
+ Text 19 "META:email"
+ Text 1 "META:url"
+
+ Text 5 "META:group"
+ Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
+
+131 bytes total in attributes.
+
Besides all the "META:*" attributes that hold the contact's information, there are two attributes that are managed by the system:
+
+
BEOS:TYPE holds the file type as a MIME string, here "application/x-person". It determines the default icon and the application that opens the file when you e.g. double click it.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" is the attribute with which Tracker keeps track of a file's icon position.
+
Note the backslash after "Clara". In Terminal you have to "escape" special characters like '"*\$?!. The space between "Clara" and "Botters" is also one of those. Therefore the backslash is really in front of the space character, and not after "Clara".
addattr adds an attribute to a file and/or fills it with a value.
+
usage: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...]
+ or: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...]
+
+ Type is one of:
+ string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, icon, raw
+ or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
+ The default is "string"
+
So, say dear Clara took a job with the multi-national Barkelbaer Inc., you fill the formerly empty "Company" attribute with that data (which is of type "string"):
+
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
rmattr suprimeix totalment un atribut d'un fitxer.
+
+
usage: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...]
+ 'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file
+ If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.
+
Though in all practicality it would be enough to just not fill the "Fax" attribute, you can completely remove it from Clara's file by typing:
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Bash and Scripting
+
+
"Scripting" is the technique of automating procedures by stringing together commands and saving it all as text files, so called "scripts". Every time you run such a script, the commands are processed one after the other just like they would if you entered them into the Terminal by hand.
+Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
In Haiku, the system makes of course also use of scripting. Booting and shutting down are typical scripting procedures. These defined sequences can be augmented by the user with certain user scripts.
+If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
Remember to end a command with an "&" to start it as a background process, or the script will halt until that command has finished (in this case: the launched app was closed again).
+
+
A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to Create Link and then navigating to the above directory.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Carregador d'Arrencada
+
+
El Carregador d'Arrencada del Haiku us pot ajudar si teniu experiència amb problemes del maquinari o voleu triar una opció per instal·lar el Haiku, si en teniu més d'una (potser una instal·lació amb un CD o amb un llapis USB).
+També pot ser útil després que hagueu instal·lat un component de programari que no us permet arrencar el sistema, i per això la voleu eliminar. L'opció Inhabilita les extensions de l'usuari indicada a continuació, permet arrencar el Haiku sense els components instal·lats per l'usuari, per exemple, un connector.
+
Per accedir a les opcions del Carregador, heu de mantenir premuda la tecla Majúscules abans de començar el procés de càrrega del Haiku. Si hi ha un carregador instal·lat, podeu començar mantenint premuda la tecla Majúscules abans de lleçar el procés de càrrega del Haiku. Si l'únic sistema operatiu del sistema és el Haiku, podeu començar mantenint premuda la tecla i veure al mateix temps els missatges de l'arrencada de la BIOS.
+
+
Un cop aquí se us ofereixen quatre menús:
+
+
Selecció del volum d'arrencada
Trieu la instal·lació del Haiku que voleu executar.
+
Select safe mode options
There are several options to try in case of hardware related trouble or if the system becomes unstable or unbootable because of a misbehaving add-on. When moving the selection bar to an option, a short explanation appears at the bottom of the screen.
+
+
+
- Safe mode
+
- Disable user add-ons
+
- Disable IDE DMA
+
- Use fail-safe video mode
+
- Don't call the BIOS
+
- Disable APM
+
- Disable ACPI
+
+
+
Select debug options
Here you'll find several options that help with debugging or getting details for a bug report. Again, a short explanation for each option is displayed at the bottom.
+
+
+
- Enable serial debug output
+
- Enable on screen debug output
+
- Disable on screen paging
+
- Enable debug syslog
+
- Display current boot loader log
(Press Q to exit the log)
+
- Add advanced debug option
+
+
+
If "Enable debug syslog" is activated, a warm reboot after a crash shows these additional options:
+
+
+
- Display syslog from previous session
+
- Save syslog from previous session
+
+
+
Selecció del mode de vídeo segur
Si heu activat l'opció Usa el mode de vídeo segur, podeu indicar la resolució i la profunditat de color.
+
+
+
Després d'activar qualsevol opció, tornareu al menú principal i el sistema continuarà amb el procés d'arrencada, que mostrarà aquesta pantalla:
+
+
+
Si tot funciona correctament, apareixeran successivament uns símbols.
+Els símbols corresponent aproximadament a aquestes etapes del procés d'arrencada:
+
+
Atom
S'estàn iniciant els mòduls.
+
Disc + lupa
S'estàn creant el guió rootfs (/) i muntant el fitxers devfs (/dev).
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Benvingut al Manual d'Usuari del Haiku
+
+
Below, you'll find the documentation of the most important aspects of Haiku. Naturally, completing and extending the documentation is a continuing process (see the online version for updated pages and translations). If you find errors, would like to suggest topics or maybe even contribute yourself, please get in touch on the documentation mailing list. If you're interested in helping with translations, you'll find information on that at the i18n user guide wiki.
The Deskbar is the little panel that by default is located in the upper right corner of the screen. It's Haiku's version of Windows' taskbar with its Start button. It contains the Deskbar menu from where you can start applications and preferences, a tray with a clock and other tools below that and a list of currently running programs at the bottom.
+
+
You can move the Deskbar to any corner or as a bar along the upper or lower border of the screen by gripping the knobbly area on one side of the tray and drag&drop it into the new position. You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag&dropping the knobbly area onto the Deskbar menu.
Show replicants - Shows/hides the little Replicant widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.
+
Mount - Offers the same options as when invoked by right-clicking the Desktop (see Mounting Volumes).
+
Deskbar preferences... - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).
+
Shutdown - Offers options to either Restart system or Power off.
+
Recent documents, folders, applications - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see Deskbar preferences below).
+
Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, Preferences - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences. You can add links to other programs (or any folder, document, query etc.) by putting them into ~/config/settings/deskbar.
+
+
+
+Deskbar Preferences
+
Menu
+
While the first couple of menu items of the Deskbar are fixed, you can customized the ones below Shutdown....
+
+
Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
+The button Edit menu... opens the folder ~/config/settings/deskbar. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, and Preferences.
+You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
+
It's even easier to simply drag a file, folder or saved query and drop it where you want it into the Deskbar.
+
+
Applications
+
The following settings don't apply to your installed applications, but to the behavior and visuals of the list of running applications.
+
+
+
Sort running applications
Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically.
+
Tracker always first
Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list.
+
Show application expander
Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar.
+
Expand new applications
Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar.
+
Hide application names
Removes the text labels of running applications.
+
Icon size
Adjusts the icon size of running applications.
+
+
+
Window
+
The last tab contains the preferences for the Deskbar window.
+
+
+
Always on top
The Deskbar always stays above all other windows.
+
Auto-raise
The Deskbar pops to the front if the mouse pointer touches it.
+
Auto-hide
The Deskbar is reduced to only a few pixels and only pops up if the mouse pointer touches them.
Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Hover the mouse over it to display the date in a tooltip. Left-click it to show a calendar. Right-click it to hide/show the clock or launch the Time preferences to set it.
+
Any program can install an icon in the tray to provide an interface to the user. The email system, for instance, shows a different symbol when there's unread mail and offers a context menu to e.g. create or check for new mail. ProcessController is another example that uses its icon in the tray to provide information (CPU/memory usage) and to offer a context menu.
You can change to a specific running application by clicking on its entry in the Deskbar and choosing (one of) its windows, from the submenu. By right-clicking you can minimize or close a window or the entire application.
+
If you activated Expanders in the Deskbar settings, you can expand/collapse the list of windows directly under an application's entry.
+
In front of every application's windows is a symbol providing info on its state. A bright symbol means a window is visible, a dark one that it's minimized. Three lines in front of a symbol shows that it's not on the current workspace.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
LaunchBox
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Ginys de l'Escriptori
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/LaunchBox
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/LaunchBox/*
+
+
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
+
All options are reached from the context menu:
+
+
Add button here
Adds an empty button.
+
Clear button
Empties a button.
+
Remove button
Removes a button.
+
Set description...
Hovering the mouse over an icon shows a tooltip with the file's name and, in case of an application, its short description if it differs from its name (see topic FileTypes). With this menu item you can customize the description for this tooltip.
+
Settings
+- Horizontal layout
+- Icon size
+- Ignore double-click
+- Show window border
+- Auto raise
+- Show on all workspaces
+Aligns the buttons horizontally.
+Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
+Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
+Shows the window border.
+LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
+Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
+
Pad
+- New
+- Clone
+- Close
+Add a new pad.
+Duplicate the current pad.
+Close the current pad.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
NetworkStatus
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Ginys de l'Escriptori
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/NetworkStatus
+
Preferències:
none
+
+
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+
+The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking on such an entry brings up a window showing its IP, broadcast and netmask address.
+Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength. Have a look at the Workshop: Wireless networking for more information on how to set up a connection.
+Lastly, you can Open network preferences... to change your network configuration or Quit the applet.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
PowerStatus
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Ginys de l'Escriptori
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/PowerStatus
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/PowerStatus settings
+
+
PowerStatus shows information about the battery level, so it's only useful on mobile computers. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+
Note: PowerStatus requires a working ACPI support.
+
+
The context menu offers these options:
+
+
Show text label
Shows battery level in percent or remaining time.
+
Show status icon
Shows icon of the applet.
+
Show percent / time
Switch between showing battery level in percent or remaining time (Show text label has to be active).
+
Battery info...
Shows the extended battery info window.
+
About...
Shows the About window.
+
Quit
Quits the PowerStatus applet.
+
+
+
When Show text label is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
ProcessController
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Ginys de l'Escriptori
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/apps/ProcessController
+
Preferències:
none
+
+
+
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
+
Indicators on the left show each CPU's usage, while the bar on the right shows the memory consumption. Remember that the number of indicators depend on the number of processors/cores in the computer.
+
If not yet running, launching ProcessController asks if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you can resize the bar-display by resizing the window and then use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
+Wherever it's installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in the Deskbar in its context menu.
+
Quit an application
+
+
To quit an application just choose its name from the Quit an application menu. This is a clean way to close app, just like clicking its close button. Be careful not to quit system processes like servers or daemons, however. Your system may stop working reliably.
+
Memory usage
+
+
Monitoring memory usage can be rather inaccurate.
+
This menu allows you to monitor memory usage of different teams in your system. Next to the team's name there are two columns: first with the amount reserved for writable memory, while the second shows all memory including read-only space (shared libraries for example).
+
The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the actually used part of the memory.
+
+
Memory used only by given application (with write access)
+
Memory including read-only space (can be shared with other applications)
+
+
+
Threads and CPU usage
+
This menu allows you to change thread priorities, kill teams or debug them.
+
Changes via the commands in this menu reach deep into the system and can cause data loss and system instability. Keep that mouse hand steady!
+
+
+
Kernel code
+
User code
+
Idle thread
+
+
At the first level you see team names. By clicking on one, you can kill the whole team. The dark-blue part of the bar is time spent in kernel code, the light-blue part in user code, the green part in the idle thread(s). A bar completely filled with blue means that the team is using all processoring power.
+
The second level shows particular threads of a team. By clicking on one, you can debug or kill it. A bar completely filled with blue means that the thread is pegging one processor/core.
+
The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be it's priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business.
+
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Conserva la posició de la finestra del quadre.
+
+
+
+
You find the Workspaces applet with the other Desktop applets in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
+Change workspace count... will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
+
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold SHIFT while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.
To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALTFx.
+
For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Filesystem layout
+
+
Haiku's filesystem layout is quite transparent, trying to always use non-cryptic names for files and folders, that don't leave the user guessing. Files and folders that are important for the system to function properly, are protected from accidental tempering by showing one of these alerts:
+
+
+
The second alert pops up if you try to rename or delete something in the system hierarchy. Here, the "Rename" button will only become clickable when you're holding down the SHIFT key.
+
Generally, there are three separate branches springing from the root folder of the boot volume:
+
+
/boot/system/
belongs to the system. Don't touch!
+
/boot/common/
holds files that are shared between users.
+
/boot/home/
is your personal folder where you keep your data and settings.
Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
+Whatever it's named, you should not alter what's inside. Every update of Haiku can add, remove or overwrite anything within it. If you want to add functionality, maybe with other Tracker Add-Ons or Translators or maybe another hardware driver, you install these things under your own /boot/home/ hierarchy or, if it's supposed to be for every user, under /boot/common/. As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+
So, let's say you want to install a new Translator for the latest image format, you don't simply copy it into the respective system folder. Remember: Don't touch!
+Instead, you put it into the mirrored hierarchy under /boot/common/ or /boot/home/config/.
+
In our example the location for Translators in the system folder would be
This has another advantage: If the component you have installed messes things up (which is possible as you install hardware drivers like this, too) you are able to choose "Disable user add-ons" from the Boot Loader menu and are thus always able to boot without the offending component.
+
Most of the time, however, you won't have to deal with these things at all, since every software that comes from a trusted source should include an installation routine that handles these things.
+
+
Haiku is not a multi-user system yet. Once it is though, every user has her own home folder that is not accessible to anyone else. Every application or added component like Tracker Add-Ons, Translators etc. as well as any data that's supposed to be shared between different users, has to be put under /boot/common/.
This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. However, you shouldn't mess too much with the ~/config/ directory and its subfolders. You could delete e.g. the ~/config/settings/ folder without damaging the operating system itself, but who wants to lose all his configurations and application settings? In any case, the system warns you with the at the top mentioned alert.
+
Besides the ~/config/add-ons/ folder, which mirrors the system's add-ons folder for additional components as described above, there are a few other folders of interest. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+
+
~/mail
+
By default, this is where your mails are kept.
+
+
~/queries
+
Queries are stored, by default temporarily for 7 days, in this folder.
+
+
~/config/be/
+
Again from our BeOS legacy, the be folder contains what's shown in the Deskbar menu. You can add and remove items by putting files, folders, links or queries into this folder.
+
+
~/config/bin/
+
Complements the system's /boot/system/bin/ folder and holds all your command line programs.
+
+
~/config/boot/
+
This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down.
+
+
~/config/boot/launch/
+
Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up.
+
+
~/config/data/fonts/
+
Simply copy a TrueType or Postscript font into this folder and its usable right away.
+
+
~/config/settings/
+
This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there.
+
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings.
+
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
+
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
+
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template.
+
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Tipus d'arxius
+
+
Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
+
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
+
+
Trieu...
shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image.
+
Igual que...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
+
+
The Default application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same as... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype add-on of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
If you invoke the Filetype add-on on an executable (here: StyledEdit), you'll get a different dialog:
+
+
On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
+
Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+
+
Arrancada única
Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.
+
Arrancada múltiple
Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.
+
Arrancada exclusiva
Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.
+
Només arguments
Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.
+
En segón pla
The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+
+
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
+
At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
+
All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
Haiku's graphical user interface is an integral part of the system. Unlike Unix-based operating systems, there's no separate window manager and booting just into a command line shell is not possible. Haiku's focus being on the desktop user, this is just not considered necessary.
+
As you probably have experience with other graphical environments, let's skip over the standards like menus, right-click context menus, drag&drop etc. Let's have a look at the few unique aspects of Haiku's GUI instead.
+
+
There are only a few things in Haiku's GUI that aren't obvious and deserve an explanation.
+
+
The Deskbar is Haiku's "Start" menu and taskbar, if you will. See topic Deskbar.
+
The yellow tab offers more than just a program's name or a document's filename:
+
You can move it by holding the SHIFT key while dragging it to another position, enabling you to stack a number of windows and conveniently access them by their named tab.
+
You minimize a window with a double-click on its tab (or with CTRLALTM). A such hidden window can be accessed by its entry in the Deskbar or the Twitcher.
+
You can send a window to the back with a right-click on its tab (or its border).
+
The close button.
+
The "zoom" button (or CTRLALTZ). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size. It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+
The window border. Left-dragging moves the window, right-dragging resizes.
Moving and resizing windows is a large part of interacting with several concurrently running applications. Instead of aiming at the small yellow title tab or the even tinier window border, there's a more convenient way to move a window. Also, additionally to its small size, the resize corner has another limitation: It only allows resizing at and in the direction of the lower right corner. Right-dragging a border for resizing works, but again you'll have to aim carefully.
+
To address these issues, Haiku provides a neat solution using the window management key combo CTRLALT and the mouse. See also chapter Shortcuts and key combinations for more shortcuts concerning window management.
+
+
Holding down CTRLALT will highlight the window borders nearest to the mouse pointer. Move the mouse in the direction of another border to change the target. Click and dragging with the right mouse button will resize the window along the highlighted border(s).
+
Hold down CTRLALT and click and drag with the left mouse button anywhere in a window to move it around. A quick click with the right mouse button sends it to the back.
Haiku's user interface provides a unique feature that puts the fact that windows have a yellow tab instead of a full-width title bar to perfect use. It's called "Stack & Tile".
+In the example below, a Tracker window with bookmarks is tiled to the left of a WebPositive window, which itself is stacked with another Tracker window showing the source folder haiku. In this animation, the user clicks on the tabs of the stacked windows to alternately bring one or the other to the front.
+
+
Connected like this, the group of windows can be moved and resized together - a nice arrangement to work in a more project centric environment. Instead of looking for the right browser window with documentation, editor and Tracker windows and maybe a related email concerning one project you are currently working on, just stack&tile them together.
+
Doing the actual arranging of windows is easy: Hold down OPT while dragging a window by its tab close to another window's tab or border until it's highlighted and release the mouse button.
+
Stack & Tile consists of two related parts.
+
+
+
"Stacking" is putting windows on top of each other, automatically moving the yellow tabs into position.
+While holding OPT, tabs change color when they overlap; drop the window to establish the stacking.
+
+
+
"Tiling" means gluing windows horizontally or vertically together.
+Again, while holding OPT, the borders that'll fuse together when you drop the window change color when brought near each other.
+
Separation is done in the same way, by holding OPT while dragging a window by its tab out of the group.
When opening or saving a file from any application, a panel like this opens:
+
+
It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
+You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
+
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
Many shortcuts in open and save panels are the same used in Tracker. Besides the commands that are also available through the File menu, there are a few not that obvious:
The Favorites menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
+
+
To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose Favorites | Add current folder. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose Favorites | Configure favorites... and delete its entry.
+All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to Show replicants is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
+
+
The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag & drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
+A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's About window and to Remove replicant.
+
Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Unfortunately, this will remove all Replicants from the Desktop.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Índex
+
+
Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
+The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+
+
+Indexing commands in Terminal
+
There are several commands to manage the index:
+
+
lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
+These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
+Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added,
+ defaults to current volume.
+ -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int",
+ "llong", "string", "float", or "double".
+ Defaults to "string".
+ --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from.
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being created
+
+
+
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
+Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
+
+
reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
+ -r enter directories recursively
+ -v verbose output
+ -f create/update all indices from the source volume,
+ "attr" is the path to the source volume
+
+
+
+
rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
+
+Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been
+done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for
+files with the INDEX_NAME attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be
+ removed
+ -h, --help display this help and exit
+ -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed
+
+INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute.
+
+If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Shortcuts and key combinations
+
+
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
+
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
+
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
Additionally to the general shortcuts, here are some more for navigating with Tracker:
+
+
ALT↑
Opens the parent folder.
+
ALT↓ or Intro
Opens the selected folder.
+
OPT
Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse.
+
MENU
Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC).
+
ALTZ
Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good.
Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed.
+
↑ / ↓
Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.
+
CTRLR
Bash history. All the commands you enter
+are stored in the file ~/.bash_history. Press CTRLR and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRLR until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it.
You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
+
+
SHIFT
This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on.
+
ALT
Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection.
+
+
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
+Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be configured to filter out all non-matching files. See the topic on type-ahead filtering.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Preferències
+
+
While a key philosophy of Haiku is to cut down on options and have sensible defaults instead, there are some things that have to be configured or can be set to individual preference. You find all panels in Deskbar's Preferences menu.
Haiku fa servir tres tipus de lletra diferents per a diferents casos. Podeu triar els tipus de lletra normal, negreta i d'amplada fixa i les mides que el sistema farà servir. A més, també podeu triar la lletra que es farà servir al menús.
Per tal d'instal·lar nous tipus de lletra, els heu de copiar a la pcarpeta corresponent de l'usuari, per exemple. /boot/common/data/fonts/ o /boot/home/config/data/fonts/ (veieu l'apartat Sistema d'arxius).
A la pestanya Colors, podeu canviar el colors de les diferent parts de la interfície d'usuari. Podeu canviar el color arrossegant i enganxant des d'altres programes, el que permet arrossegar colors des de, per exemple Pinzell Màgic, Icon-O-Matic o del tauler Fons.
La decoració determina l'aspecte de les finestres i tots els elements de la interfície. Ara per ara Haiku vé amb només una decoració. Si trobeu i instal·leu altres decoracions, podeu triar-ne altres des del menú desplegable.
La pestanya Suavitzat ofereix alguns ajustaments sobre la visualització a la pantalla.
+
+
+
+Consigna de glifs
+
Podeu alinear totes les lletres de forma que totes les línies verticals i horitzontals estiguin justament sobre dos píxels, activant l'opció Consigna de glifs. El resultat és un contrast perfecte, especialment quan es tracta de negre sobre blanc. El text apareix més nítid. L'opció Només tipus de lletres monoespaiades és especialment útil amb els dispositius de baixa resolució, com ara els netbooks. Activant hinting els tipus de lletra petits poden tenir força mal aspecte, però aquesta opció permet utilitzar el hinting per als editors i el terminal amb millors resultats.
+
Podeu veure la diferència en utilitzar la consigna en aquestes captures ampliades:
+
+
Consigna: desactivat
Consigna: activat
+
+
Cal indicar que totes les finestres de la Lupa d'aquesta pàgina, estàn, por suposat, renderitzades amb les opcions respectives. Per tan, obteniu el resultat real de les opcions comparant, per exemple, el títol de la pestanya groga en negreta o el text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
+
+
+Tipus de suavitzat
+
Una altre tècnica per millorar el renderitzat és el Suavitzat, que es aplicable a tots els gràfics vectorials i també al text. Fa més clares les línies canviant el color d'alguns píxels. Hi ha dos mètodes per fer-ho:
+
Escala de grisos canvia la intensitat dels píxels de les vores.
+Subpíxel LCD ho fa encara millor, especialment amb monitors LCD (d'alta resolució). Canvia el color en lloc de la intensitat, el que fa moure la vora una fracció de píxel, ja que les pantalles LCD mostren cada píxel amb un component vermell, verd i blau.
+
Veieu els dos mètodes en captures també ampliades:
+
+
Escala de grisos, amb Consigna: desactivada
Subpíxel LCD, amb Consigna: activada
+
+
El suavitat basat en subpíxels afegeix una lleugera brillantor al color dels objectes. Pot no agradar a tothom. A Haiku podeu barrejar els dos mètodes de suavitzat i trobar l'ajustament correcte amb mitjançant una barra lliscant.
+
El suavitzat basat en subpixels combinat amb la consigna de glifs no està disponible per omissió ja que està subjecte a una patent de programari. Segons a on viviu, podrieu obtenir una versió no bloquejada. Ho sentim. Parleu amb el vostre representan.
+
Si s'activa la consigna i també el suavitzat de subpíxels LCD canviant el codi font i es torna a compilar, el que s'obté comparat amb la consigna d'escala de grisos és el següent:
+
+
EScala de grisos, amb Consigna: activada
Subpíxel LCD, amb Consigna: activada
+
+
+
A la part inferior del tauler hi ha dos botons:
+
+
Opcions per Omissió
Reinicia tot als valors per omissió.
+
Desfés
restaura les opcions que eren actives en iniciar les preferències de l'Aparença.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - conserva la posició de la finestra del tauler
+
+
Podeu triar un color o ina imatge de fons per a cada carpeta i l'Escriptori i per a cada espai de treball.
+
+
+
La llista desplegable de la part superior indica si els vostres canvis s'apliquen només a l'espai de treball actual, tots els espais, una carpeta concreta, o l'opció per omissió, per a totes les noves carpetes.
+
A sota podeu assignar una imatge o triar Cap si només voleu un fons de color. També podeu arrossegar una imatge sobre la pantalla que es mostra a l'esquerra.
+
Fi feu servir una imatge, heu de decidir on la col·locareu:
+
+
Manual
us permet indicar les. Podeu arrossegar la imatge a la previsualització de l'esquerra o indicar manualment la coordenada X i la Y.
+
Centrat
centra la imatge al mig de la pantalla.
+
Amplia
amplia la imatge fins omplir la pantalla ignorant les seves proporcions.
+
Mosaic
emplena la pantalla repetint la imatge.
+
+
Activant l'opció Vora de les etiquetes de les icones s'afegirà una línia al voltant de les etiquetes de les icones.
+
El text de l'etiqueta de la icona serà blanc o negre segons el color del comptagotes. Un color fosc farà que el text sigui blanc, un color clar el farà negre. Així si trieu una imatge molt brillant com a fons, també hauríeu de triar un color clar pel comptagotes per que les icones de les etiquetes es puguin llegir en color negre. (O bé activa la vora de les etiquetes anterior.)
+El color que trieu també es veurà al Giny dels espais de treball, que ignora les imatges de fons.
+
+
Desfés
torna als paràmetres que eren actius en obrir les preferències del Fons d'Escriptori.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
DataTranslations
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/DataTranslations
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/* - Cada traductor gestiona el seu propi fitxer de aquí un cop canvieu les seves per omissió.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Conserva la posició de la finestra del quadre.
+
+
Every application has the ability to open and save every file format for which there's a Translator installed. The settings for these Translators are configured in the DataTranslations preferences.
+
+
+
Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an Info... button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.
+The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.
+
+
Imatges BMP
24bits, no comprimit, sense transparència
+
Imatges EXR
ILM's high dynamic-range (HDR) format
+
Imatges GIF
8bit, lossless compression, transparency
+You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette.
+You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand.
+
Imatges JPEG2000
24bits, no comprimit, sense transparència
+Here, you normally only care about the output quality.
+
Imatges JPEG
24bits, no comprimit, sense transparència
+Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little.
+
Imatges PCX
24bits, no comprimit, sense transparència, format PC Paintbrush Exchange
+
Imatges PNG
32bit, lossless compression, transparency
+
Imatges PPM
24bits, no comprimit, sense transparència, format Portable PixMap
Screenshots, charts, black&white drawings and other images with few used colors, as well as small pictures are best saved as GIF (up to 256 colors) or PNG (millions of colors). JPEG, for example, introduces compression artefacts without gain in smaller filesize.
El quadre de preferències de la Barra de l'Escriptoi també es accessible des de la Barra de l'Escriptori. Les seves preferències s'expliquen a l'apartat Barra de l'Escriptori.
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+
+
First, you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
+
Now you enter your E-mail address, Login name and Password, give an Account name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real name.
+
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses. If that is not the case, clicking Next will open another window to enter this information by hand:
+
+
You first set the Server name, Login type and Connection type for the incoming mail, below that for the outgoing mail. You should find the necessary information on your email provider's website.
+See below for more info about the various settings and additional options.
By selecting the name of an account in the left list, you can change some general settings:
+
+
The Account name is the name that's shown for example in the list of accounts in the E-mail preferences. Real name is the name someone sees when she gets mail from you. Return address is the email address that is used when someone replies to your mail. Normally that is the same address you've sent your email from.
+
If you'd like to use an email account to only send or only receive email, you can de/activate that usage by right-clicking the account's name in the leftside list to set the checkmarks accordingly.
Click on Incoming under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+
First is the Mail server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Then you enter your login information, Login name and Password, and if necessary change the Login type from the default Plain text to APOP for authentication.
+
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
+
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify IMAP folders to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+
Also, you can opt to only Partially download messages larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
+
You can change the Destination of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
Click on Outgoing under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+
First is the SMTP server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
+
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Destination of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
Notifications for newly arrived email and methods to sort and filter emails are found in E-Mail filters under an account's name. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other and rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.
+Currently there are three Incoming mail filters you can add. After adding a filter, you have to select it to see its options.
+
+
+
+Filtre de correu brossa (Baiesià AGMS)
+
+
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
+
Together with the following Rule filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
+
+
+Filtre amb regles
+
+
This filter compares the mail header to a search pattern and performs some action according to the rules you set up.
+ With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
+
+
Nom
+
the name of the sender
+
De
+
the e-mail address of the sender
+
A
+
your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)
+
Respón a
+
the e-mail address replies are sent to
+
Quan
+
the date and time the mail was received
+
Tema
+
the subject line
+
Cc
+
addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc)
+
Compte
+
the name of the e-mail's account
+
Estat
+
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
+
Prioritat
+
is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")
+
Fil
+
essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:
+
Grup de classificació
+
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
+
Estimació Brossa/Genuí
+
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
+
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+
With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+
+
+
+Avís de correu entrant
+
+
There are several ways you can choose to be notified of newly arrived email. Under Method you find a number of options that can be combined as well:
+
+
cap
+
No notification
+
Bip
+
Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences for every new email
+
Alerta
+
Shows an alert window for every new email
+
LEDs del teclat
+
Blinks some LEDs like the caps-lock indicator
+
Alerta central
+
Shows one alert window for all new mails
+
Bip central
+
Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences once for new mail
+
Registre
+
Shows the log window
+
+
+
+
+Filtres de correu sortint
+
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+ It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+
Under Mail checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only when dial-up is connected and also Schedule outgoing mail when dial-up is disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
+
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While sending, While sending and receiving or Always.
+
Make sure to Start mail services on startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+
Edit mailbox menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+
From that menu, you can also Create new message..., Check for mail now or edit Preferences....
+
If you hold down SHIFT when invoking the context menu, you'll get additional commands:
+
+
Comprova només el correu de
+
Offers a submenu to check only one specific account
+
Envia els correus pendents
+
Allows you to send pending mails without also checking for new mails
+
Tanca els serveis de correu
+
Quits the whole email infrastructure (mail_daemon)
+
+
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Keymap
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Keymap
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps.
+~/config/settings/Key_map
+
+
+
+
To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
+Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
+
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
+
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
+
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
+
Select dead keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
+
Switch shortcut key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
+
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.
+When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
+
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
+
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
+
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
+
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+
keymap -d > MyKeymap
+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use e.g. SpicyKeys.
+
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
keymap -s < MyKeymap
+
If you'd like to import this keymap into the Keymap panel, you have to compile it first to a binary format:
+
keymap -c < MyKeymap
+
This will produce a file keymap.out which you can load into Keymap via its Open... menu. By the way, the keymap command is able to load this binary format as well: keymap -l < keymap.out
+
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Locale
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Locale
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Locale settings
+
+
+
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
+
If you would like to help with translations or start with a language that is currently missing, please get in contact on the Haiku-i18n mailing list.
+
+Language
+
Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
+
+
In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
+As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+
+Formatting
+
On the Formatting tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+
+
You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
+If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to Use month/day-names from preferred language.
+
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
+Options
+
The last tab provides an option that will Translate application and folder names in Deskbar and Tracker. Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+
+
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+
+
Opcions per Omissió
Reinicia tot als valors per omissió.
+
Desfés
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Ratolí
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Mouse
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Mouse_settings
+
+
+
+
First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker....
+
There are three Focus modes that determine how windows react to clicks:
+
+
Click to focus and raise
This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top.
+
Click to focus
Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keysCTRLALT.
+
Focus follows mouse
The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the Click to focus mode.
+
+
Activating Accept first click relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Opcions per Omissió
Reinicia tot als valors per omissió.
+
Desfés
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Xarxa
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Network
+
Preferències:
/boot/common/settings/network/resolv.conf
+
+
+
+
At the top, you choose which network adapter to configure.
+
Then you specify if you get your network automatically (via DHCP) or if you're using static addresses. If it's the latter, you'll have to fill out IP Address, Netmask, Gateway and DNS Servers yourself. Otherwise the panel will show the addresses currently set with DHCP.
+
+
Desfés
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Network preferences.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Screen
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Screen
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Each of your workspaces can have its own resolution, color depth and refresh rate.
+
+
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other menus contain all supported resolution, color depth and refresh rate settings.
+
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
+
To the left, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and it's resolution in dots per inch (dpi). Hovering the mouse pointer over it shows a tooltip with the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
+
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
+
While Haiku's VESA mode performs very well, you may experience some limitations. You may not be able to drive your widescreen display in its native resolution, resulting in a somewhat blurred picture. There may also be limitations with regard to available color depths and refresh rates.
+
To the bottom left you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
+With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
+
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
+One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
+The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
+
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again.
+
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen savers and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the Test button below the list and add more screen savers with the Add... button beside it. Another way to install new screen savers is by a simple drag&drop into the list. Of course, you can also copy/delete its file in its respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/add-ons/Screen Savers/ or /boot/home/config/add-ons/Screen Savers/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Sounds
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Sounds
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Media/MMediaFilesManager
+
+
+
+
You can assign sounds to certain events in the system. Just select the event from the list and choose a sound from the pop-up menu below.
+
+
None
will silence an event.
+
Other...
will open a file panel to find a new sound that isn't yet in the menu.
+
You can use any format that's supported by the system. If MediaPlayer can deal with it, so can any other program.
+You can "pre-hear" an event's sound by selecting it and using the Play and Stop buttons.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Time
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Time
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings
+~/config/settings/timezone - A link to the current timezone in /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/*
+~/config/settings/Time_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
The panel of the Time preferences is split into two tabs:
On the left side, you can set the day of the month by simply clicking on it in the calendar. You change the month and year by clicking on it and using the up/down arrows to the right or the cursor keys on your keyboard.
+
Similarly, you set the time. There are two modes for the clock:
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Touchpad
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Touchpad
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Touchpad_settings
+
+
+
This panel offers several touchpad related settings that are interesting when you're running on a notebook.
+
+
+
+
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
+The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
+
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best if with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
+If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
+
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
+
+
Opcions per Omissió
Reinicia tot als valors per omissió.
+
Desfés
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences.
+
+
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
+Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
+
If your finger reaches a border of the touchpad while dragging an icon, but the mouse pointer hasn't yet reached the screen edge, how can you keep on dragging your icon? As soon as you lift your finger, the icon would be dropped.
+Depending on your hardware, there's a nifty feature: just leave your finger without lifting at the touchpad edge. The mouse pointer will keep on moving on auto-pilot.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Tracker
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/Tracker
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/Tracker/TrackerSettings
+
+
+
The Tracker preference panel is also available from every Tracker window with the menu Window | Preferences....
+Its functions are discussed in the topic on Tracker.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
MemòriaVirtual
+
+
Barra d'eines:
Preferències
+
Ubicació:
/boot/system/preferences/VirtualMemory
+
Preferències:
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory
+~/config/settings/VM_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Virtual memory let's the system swap out memory to harddisk, if the RAM can be used more sensibly for other things. So, even if you have lots of RAM, providing virtual memory is never a bad idea.
+
+
You can set the size to even more than your physical memory size if needed. With today's huge harddisks, assigning the physical memory size shouldn't be a problem. Still, you can quickly adjust the size if your free space ever runs low. In that case you should also have a look at DiskUsage to find out what's eating up your diskspace.
+
Normally, the swap file's written to your boot partition. If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping memory in and out, you can try to use a separate harddisk for you swap file. Simply another partition on the same harddisk with your system/data won't help.
+Upgrading your RAM is of course the most effective way to go...
+
+
Opcions per Omissió
Reinicia tot als valors per omissió.
+
Desfés
brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences.
A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
+Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
You start a query by invoking the Find... menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALTF. You're presented with the Find window:
+
+
+
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
+
Narrow down your search from All files and folders to specific file types.
+
Define the search method:
+
by Name - a basic search by file or folder name
+
by Attribute - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes
+
by Formula - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
+
Select which drives to search on.
+
Enter the search term.
+
The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
+
Uncheck the Temporary checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
+
Check if your query is supposed to Include trash.
+
Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
+
You can drag&drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at by Name, enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
You can create more advanced queries by searching within the attributes of specific file types. For that to work, these attributes have to be indexed.
+
+
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by Attribute.
+
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
+
Let's do an email query as an example:
+
+
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Botters has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "vibraphone" or "skepticality".
+As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+A good way to cut down the number of search results.
Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
+
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by Formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
+
You can use this method to construct a query in Attribute mode and then switch to Formula mode, to comfortably generate a search string to use for a query in Terminal or a script.
+
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
After you start a search, the Find window will be replaced by a result window. Here is an example that queried for "server":
+
+
Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+
+
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
+
With File | Edit query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
+
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste layout.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the Save query as template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
+
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Team Monitor
+
+
With CTRLALTDEL you invoke the Team Monitor which lists all currently running programs.
+
+
Programs that were launched by the system are blue, those started by the user black.
+Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can try to quit a program by selecting it and pressing Quit application (or either DEL or Q). If that doesn't work, try Kill application (or SHITDEL or K) instead.
+
You can summon a Terminal with OPTALTT.
+
If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): Restart the desktop will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Tracker Add-Ons
+
+
Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under Add-Ons from the context menu or the File menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
+
Tracker Add-Ons, or links to applications that can act as add-ons, can be installed in three different locations (see topic Filesystem layout):
+
+
/boot/system/add-ons/Tracker/
for system provided add-ons.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons available to every user.
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons only available to yourself.
+
+
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-O opens with ALTOPTO.
+Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
These Tracker Add-Ons come with every Haiku installation:
+
+
Background-B
+
Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background.
+
DiskUsage-I
+
Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis.
+
FileType-F
+
Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched.
+
Open Target Folder-O
+
Can only be used on a linked file and opens the folder that file lives in.
+
TextSearch-G
+
Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders).
+
ZipOMatic-Z
+
A selection of files will be added to a zip archive, invoked without a selection opens a panel to create an archive via drag&drop.
The Tracker is the graphical interface to all your files. It lets you create new files and folders or find, launch or rename as well as copy or delete existing ones.
+
Being an application like any other (the Desktop with its icons is really just a fullscreen window in the background), Tracker appears with its windows in the Deskbar and can be quit and restarted. The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the Mount submenu. You find the same Mount menu in the Deskbar.
+
+
There are also Settings so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.
+The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.
+
Before you disconnect e.g. a harddrive or USB stick, make sure you have successfully unmounted the volume. This guarantees that all data transfer has finished. Otherwise you may lose data or corrupt the disk!
By default, when you double-click a folder, Tracker opens a new window while leaving the parent window open. This can quickly lead to an overcrowded desktop.
+You can prevent that by holding down the OPT key, which automatically closes the parent window.
+This is also true for keyboard navigation. For more on that, see topic Shortcuts and key combinations.
+
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
+
+
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
+
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
+
+
Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
+
Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
+
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
+
+
In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
Instead of jumping to a file while typing, there's also the option to filter out all files not matching your type-ahead string. This can improve clarity dramatically, especially when dealing with crowded folders. By using SHIFTSPACE as delimiter, you can even filter on multiple strings.
+Contrary to type-ahead jumping, the filtering will stick until you press ESC or close the window (or leave the folder if you're using Single Window Navigation).
+This type-ahead filtering is set in the Tracker preferences.
Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the Window menu:
+
+
Icon view (ALT1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT+/-.
+
Mini icon view (ALT2) - Small icons.
+
List view (ALT3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available attributes. (See topic Attributes.)
+
+
The Window menu offers a number of other functions:
+
+
Resize to fit (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+
Arrange by... - Only available in Icon or Mini icon view, a submenu allows to set the sorting order to various properties:
+
+
Name, Real name, Size, Modified, Created, Kind, Location, Permissions
+
Reverse order - Inverts the sorting order
+
Clean up (ALTK) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Clean up all which additionally sorts all icons according to the above selected criterium.
Close (ALTW) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Close all which closes every Tracker window.
+
Close all in workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+
The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
Window | Preferences... opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
+ So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
+
+
Desktop - Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
+
Windows - You can set Single window navigation, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
+
+
+
Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy & paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+
Activating Type-ahead filtering will filter the contents of a Tracker window while you type to only display the files matching your string in their name or any currently displayed attribute. See above.
+
Trash - Set the behavior when deleting a file.
+
Volume icons - Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
+
+
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's Preferences.
When invoked on a selected file, most of the File menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
+
As usual the commands are pretty clear.
+
+
Find... - Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+
New - Create a new folder or any other file based on a template.
+
+
+
Choosing Edit templates... opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the New menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
+
Open with... - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
+
+
+
+
The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the Open with... entry instead, a panel opens:
+
+
+
Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the Open and make preferred button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
+
Get info
+
+
+
The panel presents info on the selected file and lets you set the default application and, after you expanded that part of the panel, permissions and owner. Clicking on the path will open it in a Tracker window.
+
Edit name, Duplicate and Move to trash - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
+
Move to, Copy to and Create link - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
+
Cut, Copy and Paste - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can Copy/Cut more files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
+
Identify - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to Force identify which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
+
Add-Ons - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
+
+
To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Tuitxer
+
+
The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
+
Just tap CTRLTAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRLTAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRLTAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
+
You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
+
It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRLTAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
+
The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+
+
ESC
Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window.
This workshop takes a look on how to manage email under Haiku. It assumes that the email services are correctly configured with the E-Mail preferences and you're familiar with the basic features of the Mail application.
If you come to Haiku from other operating systems, you're probably used to big applications like MS Outlook or Mozilla's Thunderbird. You have to configure them by entering all the info on mail server addresses etc. and they use their own contacts database. They take care of sending and fetching email and store them in some big special file.
+Changing you email client can be a hassle with quite some ex/importing and converting going on. Using more than one client in parallel to check out what else is available is also not without the occasional kerfuffle.
+
Haiku's mail system is different. It breaks down into smaller separate modules.
+
There's the mail_daemon that takes care of the communication with your mail servers. The E-Mail preferences is the one central point to configure your email accounts and how often they're checked, for example.
+
Every message that is fetched or sent is saved as one single email file, with its header information (like sender, subject, date) and status (like New, Replied, Sent) in BFS attributes. This enables searching/filtering them with Haiku's fast queries.
+
+
With every email being in a separate file, viewing them becomes just as easy as browsing through a folder (or query result) of images with ShowImage. Leaving the Tracker window open, you'll see the moving selection of the currently viewed file while you use the previous/next button to move through them.
+As they are independent files, using a viewer other than Haiku's Mail causes no problems whatsoever.
+
Similarly, creating a new message results in just another file that is handed to the mail_daemon that takes care of sending it off. Contact management is deferred to the People application.
+
In a nutshell, where other mail clients do everything, from communicating with the mail servers to providing a view with all your mails and tools to search and filter them, Haiku uses a chain of smaller tools and general file management:
+
+
The mail_daemon to fetch/send mail and save them as normal files.
+
Tracker windows and queries to find and show email files.
+
The Mail application to view email files and create new messages relying on system-wide contact management by the People app.
+
+
Especially using Tracker and queries to manage emails is a powerful idea. The experience you gain can be transferred to any other problem that is dealing with files. Be it images, music, video, contacts or any other documents, using Tracker is at the core of all file managing.
+Also, improvements in any of these system areas benefit not just emailing, but all applications that make use of them.
When you browse through your newly arrived email, you may want to come back to some of them later to think about it in more depth. While you could use Mail's menu Close and | Leave as New to keep them in your "New messages" query, things tend to pile up that way...
+
One solution is of course to just start a reply and save it as draft. But if you don't expect to write a reply and just want to re-read the mail later, that isn't ideal.
+
+
Better use Close and | Set to... to create a new status and use that to categorize your mail. For example, you could call the status "Later", and then query for that when you find more time.
+Or you use different statuses for specific projects. For example, I created a status "HUG" (for "Haiku user guide") under which I collect every mail that may influence the contents of the user guide, like commit messages about code changes that alter or introduce some feature or anything else I feel could improve the user guide.
+In any case, try to keep the status name short. That way it always fits in a normally wide "Status" column in Tracker.
+
You don't have to open an email with the Mail application to set its status. With the Tracker add-ons Mark as Read and Mark as... you can select some email files and set their status in one go.
Sure, you specify a folder to store all your email, you can open it et voilà, there's all you mail. But over time the folder becomes crowded and showing all will take longer and longer as thousands of files and their attributes have to be parsed and sorted. Also, most of the time you don't really care about two year old emails of Nigerian princes and their inheritory trouble ...
+
A lot of time when populating a folder is spent on putting files read from disk into the correct sorting order and displaying that in the window. If you do have to open a folder with a huge number of files, you can shorten the wait by making the Tracker window "invisible", i.e. either minimize it or change to another workspace. Watch ProcessController to see how it affects CPU usage.
By using queries, you can narrow down the view of your mails. Actually, the mailbox icon in the Deskbar uses queries.
+
+
The Open Draft submenu does a query for the status "Draft", which is set by Mail when you save a message.
+
Open Inbox Folder and Open Mail Folder are just links to regular folders (and not very useful in my opinion).
+
The # new messages submenu is populated by a query for email with the status "New" (that same query is used to change the mailbox icon to show some letters in it, by the way).
+
+
You can add your own queries (or folders, applications, scripts etc.) to that context menu too, by putting them or links to them into ~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links.
+
The query ~/config/settings/Mail/mailbox is a special case: It is executed when left-clicking the mailbox icon in the Deskbar. If you want to change that behavior, you can replace it with any other file (or link to a file), just name it "mailbox". It doesn't have to be a query, a link to a folder of queries or a script or application works just as well.
If you don't save a query as "Query" but as "Query template", invoking it won't show the result window, but the Find... window instead. That way you can easily exchange the search string for the subject or sender, for example, or change a "2 days" time limit to "3 days".
+
Activating "type-ahead filtering" in Tracker's preferences allows you to very quickly filter a query result even further. Often it's enough to query for all mails of the last 3 days and go with type-ahead filtering from there. The big advantage is, that you don't have to exactly specify which attribute to search for, as all displayed are considered when filtering.
+
RelatedMail is a nifty little application that will query for all mails with the same subject/sender/time-frame etc. of a dropped email. Kind of what the Queries menu in the Mail app is supposed to do.
Tutorial: Tipus de fitxers, Atributs, Índex i Consultes
+
+
This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I planned to use a bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but since Haiku didn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at that time, I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+With WebPositive, Haiku now has a browser using bookmark files again, so you could as well use a bookmark file instead of an image as basic filetype for our database files.
+In any case, to these files we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
+
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
+
+
Títol de la película
+
Gènere
+
URL a, per exemple, IMdB
+
Director/Repartiment
+
Plot
+
La meva valoració de 1 a 10
+
Coordinates in my shelf, e.g. A2, B3, so I find the DVD also in Real Life :)
Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the Add... button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal Name" to DVDdb.
Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag&drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
You can add suffixes like .txt, .jpg, .mp3 to recognize files by their extention. Useful when working with files from systems without MIME typing. We don't need that for our example.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
+
+
Trieu...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
Igual que...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the Add... button opens a panel:
+
+
+
Attribute name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+
Internal name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+
Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
+
String for normal text
+
Boolean for binary data: 0 or 1
+
Integer for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
+
8 bit: ± 255
+
16 bit: ± 65,535
+
32 bit: ± 4,294,967,295
+
64 bit: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615
+
+
+
Float for floatingpoint numbers, single precision
+
Double for floatingpoint numbers, double precision
+
Time for time and date format
+
+
+
+
+
Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
+
Display as - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.
+
Editable - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.
+
Width - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.
+
Alignment - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.
Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
+
This leaves these attributes:
+
+
Nom Intern
Tipus d'atribut
+
DVDdb:title
text
+
DVDdb:genre
text
+
DVDdb:cast
text
+
DVDdb:rating
int-32
+
+
+
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
+
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+
Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the Attributes menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+
By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALTE) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFTTAB you can navigate between attributes.
+
In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+
Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under New... besides the default "New folder".
Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+
Open the new folder and paste in the layout with Attributes | Paste layout. Voilà:
Getting the networking to run is essential in today's need for permanent internet connection. As keeping up to date with all the different and ever changing hardware and drivers is quite impossible for a small project, Haiku relies on a FreeBSD compatibility layer for its networking drivers.
+This ensures a massive amount of supported hardware, though probably not 100% of what's out there. See this list online for a list of supported models or check FreeBSD 9.1's release hardware notes.
+
Currently only PCI, PCI-X, PCI-Express, Mini PCI, and Mini PCI-Express devices are expected to work.
+PCMCIA, CardBus, ExpressCard, USB and ISA devices still need more work to become functional.
Even if the first hurdle of generally supported hardware is taken, some wireless network cards require binary firmware modules to properly operate. Haiku cannot include some of these proprietary firmware files due to licensing issues. Haiku does however include a simple script which will retrieve and install all of the needed proprietary bits for you. Generally, if you are planning to use wireless networking, it is a good idea to run this script to ensure your system has all of these firmwares available when they are needed.
+
Open a Terminal and type:
+
install-wifi-firmwares.sh
+
Now review the licenses and accept them to install all of the available firmware files.
+
+
If you don't have internet access to download those lacking firmwares under Haiku, there's an offline method, see under tips below.
By default, Haiku will join the first unencrypted wireless network it finds after booting up. To connect to a specific network, you use the Desktop applet NetworkStatus.
+
Right-click on its icon in the Deskbar and choose the network's public name (which is the "SSID" it broadcasts) from the context menu.
+
+
A window opens where you enter the type of authentication (probably WPA/WPA2, WEP is not a secure encryption anymore!) and the password for that wireless network. Click OK to start the login process. Depending on your hardware and network configuration this may take a while. You'll be kept informed of the progress by notifications:
+
+
Once it reads "Ready" and the NetworkStatus icon in the Deskbar shows a green round light, the connection is established. If the notifications end in "No link" and a yellow triangle, something went wrong, probably an incorrect password.
If you prefer to use the command line or would like to use scripting or the ~/config/boot/UserBootscript to automate things to join a specific network on bootup, there's the command ifconfig.
+
Start a Terminal and enter the first line to scan for available wireless networks:
The path to your wireless network adapter has to be adjusted, of course.
+The output shows the public name (SSID), MAC address, signal strength and authentication method of all found networks.
+
To join a network, use this line and insert the respective public name (SSID) and password:
Make sure the initial configuration of the wireless network adapter after booting up has finished, before issuing ifconfig commands or they might be ignored. Depending on your hardware and network configuration that may take a while. Watch those notifications...
Here is how you get to install your firmware if you don't yet have a working internet connection under Haiku. You download the following files while in another operating system, boot Haiku, copy them to their respective location and invoke the install-wifi-firmwares.sh script.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
+
Espais de Treball
+
+
Els Espais de treball són escriptoris virtuals, complets amb la seva pròpia resolució, profunditat de color i fons. A les preferències de la Pantalla es poden establir fins a 32 espais de treball.
You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALTFx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
+Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
+
Another very convenient way is to use CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
+
You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
Verkkoyhteyksien saaminen toimimaan on olennasta nykypäivän tarpeessa pysyvään internet-yhteytteen. Koska erilaisten ja jatkuvasti muuttuvien laitteistojen ja ajurien pitäminen ajan tasalla on aika mahdotonta pienelle projektille, Haiku käyttää FreeBSD-yhteensopivuuskerrosta verkkoajureissaan.
-Tämä takaa valtavan joukon tuettuja laitteita, vaikka se ei luultavasti kata 100 prosenttia markkinoilla olevista. Katso tätä luetteloa verkossa tuetuista malleista tai tarkista FreeBSD 9:n julkistettujen laitteiden tiedot.
Nykyisin vain PCI-, PCI-X-, PCI-Express-, Mini PCI-, ja Mini PCI-Express-laitteiden otaksutaan toimivan.
PCMCIA-, CardBus-, ExpressCard-, USB- ja ISA-laitteet tarvitsevat vielä työtä tullakseen toimiviksi.
Arriver à faire fonctionner le réseau est indispensable pour répondre au besoin actuel d'avoir en permanence une connexion internet. Comme maintenir à jour les pilotes pour du matériel toujours différent et en constante évolution est tout à fait impossible pour un petit projet, Haiku s'appuie sur une couche de compatibilité FreeBSD pour ses pilotes réseaux.
-Cela permet de supporter un grand nombre de matériels, mais probablement pas 100% de ce qui existe. Consultez cette liste des modèles supportés ou compulsez les notes de parution FreeBSD 9 dédiées au matériel.
Pour le moment, seuls les périphériques PCI, PCI-X, PCI-Express, Mini PCI, and Mini PCI-Express sont supportés. Les périphériques PCMCIA, CardBus, ExpressCard, USB and ISA ont encore besoin de travail avant de devenir fonctionnels.
Manapság az internet mindennapi szükségletünkké vált. A hálózati eszközök sokfélesége miatt az azokhoz tartozó vezérlők frissen tartsása szinte lehetetlen ilyen kis project esetében, mint a Haiku, ami a FreeBSD kompatibilis hálózati struktúrát használja a vezérlőkhöz.
-Bár ez a módszer biztosítja az eszközök jelentős részének a használatát, azonban sajnos nem az összes jelenleg is elérhetőt. Egy interneten megtalálható listában ellenőrizhetjük, hogy melyek a jelenleg használható eszközök, illetve vessünk egy pillantást a FreeBSD 9's release hardware notes oldalára is.
+Bár ez a módszer biztosítja az eszközök jelentős részének a használatát, azonban sajnos nem az összes jelenleg is elérhetőt. Egy interneten megtalálható listában ellenőrizhetjük, hogy melyek a jelenleg használható eszközök, illetve vessünk egy pillantást a FreeBSD 9.1's release hardware notes oldalára is.
Jelenleg csak a PCI, PCI-X, PCI-Express, Mini PCI, és a Mini PCI-Express eszközök működhetnek.
A PCMCIA, a CardBus, az ExpressCard, az USB és az ISA esetében további fejlesztésekre van szükség.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Aplicativos
+
Aplicativos
+
Antes de mergulharmos dentro de todos os aplicativos que vem com o Haiku, vamos dar uma olhada detalhada em como instalar e desinstalar programas que foram baixados de algum lugar, por exemplo de um sítio mencionado na página Boas Vindas.
Deve-se descompactar/instalar arquivos somente dentro do Haiku. Se extrair um pacote no Linux ou Windows, por exemplo, e apenas copiar a pasta no Haiku depois, todos os atributos vitais são perdidos, porque aqueles sistemas operacionais normalmente não lidam com metadados.
@@ -74,73 +76,73 @@
Naturalmente, esta distinção se tornará relevante apenas quando o Haiku tiver suporte a multiusuário.
Uma vez que o arquivo é descompactado, deverá dar uma olhada dentrp da pasta recém-criada. Geralmente encontramos arquivos LeiaMe ou outra documentação de interesse.
-
Alguns programas necessitam de configurações adicionais. Por exemplo, Adicionais do Rastreador, Tradutores ou outros componentes de aprimoramento do sistema tem que ser postos nas pastas certas. Ou encontrar um pequeno arquivo de script (frequentemente com o suxifo .sh) como instalar que basta um duplo clique para fazer tudo.
+
Alguns programas necessitam de configurações adicionais. Por exemplo, Adicionais do Rastreador, Tradutores ou outros componentes de aprimoramento do sistema tem que ser postos nas pastas certas. Ou encontrar um pequeno arquivo de script (frequentemente com o suxifo .sh) como instalar o qual basta um duplo clique para fazer tudo.
Algumas vezes encontramos pastas que vinculam para o destino correto denominado "arraste [nome do arquivo] aqui...". Então, simplesmente siga aquela instrução e estará feito.
-
Most of the time, however, nothing of the sort is necessary and you're done after unpacking.
-Topics Deskbar or LaunchBox describe how to add shortcuts to your newly installed application.
+
Na maioria das vezes, entretanto, nada disso é necessário e tudo estará pronto após a descompactação.
+Os tópicos Deskbar ou LaunchBox descreve como adicionar atalhos para a nova aplicação instalada.
If the installation was done with an install script, chances are, there's an uninstall script as well. In that case, double-click it and you're done.
-Otherwise, uninstalling is simply done by deleting the application's folder.
-
This, of course, leaves back possible configuration files in your ~/config/settings folder. This may be on purpose, if you want to keep those settings in case you'll install the program again in the future. Also, when the installation involved those "drag [filename] here..." folders, those files are also left behind.
-
One method to quickly get to all the app's files is to do a quick query for a significant part of the application's name. This will reveal the app's binary, its installation folder and its settings as well as possible links in the Deskbar etc. Simply select all relevant files and delete them.
+
Se a instalação foi feita com um script de instalação, é muito provável que exista um script de desinstalação. Neste caso, clique duas vezes nele e estará pronto.
+Do contrário, desinstalar é simplesmente apagar a pasta do aplicativo.
+
Isto, naturalmente, deixa para trás prováveis arquivos de configuração na sua pasta ~/config/settings. Isto pode ser proposital, se desejar manter aquelas configurações no caso de instalar o programa novamente no futuro. Também, quando a instalação envolveu pastas "arraste [nomedoarquivo] aqui...", tais arquivos serão também deixados para trás.
+
Um método para rapidamente obter todos os arquivos do aplicativo é fazer uma consulta rápida para uma parte significante do nome do aplicativo. Isto irá revelar o binário do aplicativo, sua pasta de instalação e suas configurações, assim como vínculos possíveis no Deskbar, etc. Simplesmente selecione todos os arquivos relevantes e apague-os.
Haiku comes with a set of mostly small but essential applications. You'll find all of them at /boot/system/apps/ or /boot/common/apps/. Applications that are not usually launched by a double-click on a data file (e.g. ShowImage for image files) can be found in the Applications menu of the Deskbar.
+
O Haiku vem com um conjunto de aplicativos pequenos mas principalmente essenciais. Encontre-os em /boot/system/apps/ ou /boot/common/apps/. Aplicativos que não são normalmente carregados com um clique duplo no arquivo de dados (por exemplo o ShowImage para arquivos de imagem) podem ser encontrados no menu Aplicativos do Deskbar.
Besides the normal commandline tools coming with the bash shell or are necessary to be POSIX compliant, there are a few Haiku-specific commandline applications worth mentioning. These commands are often useful for scripting purposes, see also topic Bash and Scripting.
+
Além das ferramentas normais de linha de comando que vêm com o shell bash ou são necessários para a conformidade com o POSIX, existem uns poucos aplicativos de linha de comando específicos do Haiku dignos de menção. Estes comandos são frequentemente úteis para scripting, veja também o tópico Bash e Scripting.
Besides the above listed programs, which are all maintained by the Haiku project, there are a few essential applications bundled in a standard Haiku system. Bugs and feature requests for those have to be filed with the particular maintainer.
+
Além dos programas listados acima, os quais são todos mantidos pelo projeto Haiku, existem uns poucos aplicativos essenciais empacotados em um sistema Haiku padrão. Erros e solicitações de funcionalidades devem ser registrados junto aos mantenedores particulares.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Haiku-specific commandline applications
+
Aplicações em linha de comando específicas do Haiku
Localização:
/boot/system/bin /boot/common/bin ~/config/bin
-
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in either /boot/system/bin or /boot/common/bin. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps should go in ~/config/bin. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
-The following isn't an exhaustive list of all Haiku-specific CLI apps, it serves just to highlight a few of the most useful to give you a taste. Feel encouraged to explore what's in the bin/ folders on your own a bit. Executing an app with the parameter --help shows the usage of the command and all its various options.
+
Todos os aplicativos em linha de comando que acompanham o Haiku estão em /boot/system/bin ou /boot/common/bin. Seus aplicativos em linha de comando particulares ou adicionalmente instalados devem ficar em ~/config/bin. Todas estas localidades são parte da variável PATH e são, portanto, automaticamente encontrados.
+Segue uma não exaustiva lista de todos os aplicativos de linha de comando específicos do Haiku, ele serve apenas para destacar alguns dos mais úteis para dar-lhe um gostinho. Sinta-se encorajado a explorar o que se encontra nas pastas bin/ folders por sua própria conta. Executar um aplicativo como parâmetro --help mostra o uso do comando e todos as suas variadas opções.
These commands are used to display, read out, add and remove attributes of files. Remember that these meta data are currently only available on BFS formatted volumes. Moving files onto other file systems will strip all attributes!
-All these commands are described in topic Attributes in Terminal.
Estes comandos são utilizados para exibir, ler, adicionar e remover atributos de arquivos. Lembre-se que estes metadados são atualmente apenas disponíveis em volumes formatados em BFS. Mover arquivos para outros sistemas de arquivos irá eliminar todos os atributos!
+Todos estes comandos são descritos no tópico Atributos no Terminal.
With these commands you list, make, reindex and remove attributes to BFS' index. Every volume has it's own index, remember that when copying files from one volume to another.
-These commands are described in topic Index.
Com estes comandos pode-se listar, gerar, reindexar e remover atributos para o indexador do BFS. Todo volume tem seu próprio índice, lembre-se disso quando copiar arquivos de um volume para outro.
+Estes comando são descritos no tópico Indexação.
Aqui estão umas poucas ferramentas de linha de comando que são especificamente úteis para scripting (veja também o tópico Bash e Scripting).
alert
-
alert conjures up the typical alert window with a pre-defined icon, explanatory text and up to three buttons. It will return the title of the pressed button and an exit status (starting with 0). For example, this is made of the line:
-
alert --idea "FantasticApp(tm) installed successfully!
-Would you like a link to it?" "On Desktop" "In Deskbar" "No thanks"
+
alert evoca a janela típica de alerta com um ícone predefinido, texto explicativo e até três botões. Ela irá retornar o título do botão pressionado e um status de saída (comaçando com 0). Por exemplo, isto pe feito da linha:
+
alert --idea "FantasticApp(tm) installado com sucesso!
+Gostaria de um atalho para ele?" "Na Área de Trabalho" "No Deskbar" "Não, obrigado"
filepanel
-
filepanel displays a load or save file panel and lets the user choose a file or location. As a return value you'll get the chosen file or folder's path. There are several parameters available, for example to set a starting directory, a window title, a default name when saving or restrictions to the allowed types of files. This is an example of
-
filepanel -s -t "Save your logfile" -d ~/config/settings -n Fantastic.log
+
filepanel exibe uma caixa de diálogo de abrir ou salvar arquivo e permite ao usuário escolher um arquivo ou localidade. Como um valor de retorno obtém-se o arquivo escolhido ou o caminho da pasta. Existem muitos parâmetros disponíveis, por exemplo para definir um diretório inicial, um título de janela, um nome padrão ao salvar ou restrições para os tipos de arquivos permitidos. Este é um exemplo de
+
filepanel -s -t "Salve seu arquivo de log" -d ~/config/settings -n Fantastic.log
waitfor
-
waitfor is a nice way to wait for a particular application or thread to be started or to have ended.
+
waitfor é uma maneira elegante de aguardar por um aplicativo particular ou tarefa ser iniciado ou até ter terminado.
query
-
query is the commandline version of the Find panel. In fact, a quick way to generate the search term is to build a query in the Find panel, switch to by formula, add double quotes (") in front and back and paste the whole string after your query command in Terminal or your script.
+
query é a versão em linha de comando da janela Procurar. Na verdade, uma maneira rápida para gerar o termo de pesquisa é construir uma consulta na janela Procurar, converter para por fórmula, adicionar aspas duplas (") no início e no fim e colar a sequência inteira após o comando query no Terminal ou no seu script.
checkfs is an important tool to check for errors in your file system. Simply add the volume or device name and it'll run through every file and correct inconsistencies where possible.
-
-
open
-
open is a very handy little tool. With it you open any file with its preferred application, or start a specific application by its signature without the need to know its exact path. It also works with URLs and even with the "virtual" directories . for the current directory and .. for the parent, opening the folder in Tracker.
+
checkfs é uma importante ferramenta para checar erros no seu sistema de arquivos. Simplesmente adicione o nome do volume ou dispositivo e ele irá executar através de todos os arquivos e corrigir inconsistências quando possível.
desklink
-
desklink can install an icon for any file, folder, query or application in the Deskbar tray. It also offers the option to provide a context menu when right-clicking an icon to execute special actions. As an example, try this to add the commandline app screenshot with various options (the "\" in the first line is just for the line break in Terminal):
+
desklink pode instalar um ícone para qualquer arquivo, pasta, consulta ou aplicativo na bandeja do Deskbar. Ele também oferece a opção de prover um menu de contexto quando clicar com o botão direito do mouse em um ícone para executar ações especiais. Como um exemplo, tente isto para adicionar o aplicativo de linha de comando screenshot com várias opções (a "\" na primeira linha é apenas para a quebra de linha no Terminal):
diskimage permite registrar um arquivo regular como um dispositivo de disco. Por exemplo, pode-se registrar uma imagem anyboot do Haiku, montá-la no Rastreador e copiar, editar ou remover arquivos lá antes de usá-la como fonte no Instalador.
+
+
open
+
open é uma pequena ferramenta muito prática. Com ela abre-se qualquer arquivo com seu aplicativo preferido, ou inicia um aplicativo específico pela sua assinatura sem a necessidade de conhecer seu caminho exato. Ela também trabalha com URLs e até com os diretórios "virtuais" . para o diretório atual e .. para o superior, abrindo a pasta no Rastreador.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Installer
+
Instalador
Deskbar:
Aplicativos
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/Installer
Configurações:
nenhuma
-
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
-Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
+
O Instalador é utilizado para copiar o Haiku em outro volume.
+Ao carregar ele exibe uma janela inicial com informações importantes. Não se trata de uma EULA inconsequente que costumamos fechar num piscar de olhos, ela declara:
-
This is alpha-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
-
The Installer needs a prepared partition. You may have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool until Haiku's DriveSetup is mature enough to handle this task.
-
Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. How that is done exactly is available as an online guide.
+
Este é um software de qualidade alfa. Faça cópias de segurança ou sofra as consequências!
+
O Instalador necessita de uma partição preparada. Será necessário utilizar o GParted LiveCD ou uma ferramenta similar até que o Configurador de Dispositivos do Haiku esteja maduro o bastante para lidar com esta tarefa.
+
O Haiku pode ser adicionado manualmente ao gerenciador de inicialização GRUB. Como isso é feito exatamente está descrito no guia online.
-
Once you acknowledged with Continue, you're presented with the main window:
+
Uma vez que tenha confirmado com Continue, será apresentado à janela principal:
-
In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
-The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
-
Clicking the little expander widget will Show optional packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
-
You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on Setup partitions... to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
-
Begin starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the home/ and common/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+
No primeiro menu pop-up escolha a fonte para a instalação. Pode ser um Haiku atualmente instalado ou pode vir de um CD de instalação, dispositivo USB, etc.
+O segundo menu pop-up especifica o alvo para a instalação. Esta partição/volume alvo será completamente sobrescrito e deverá ser preparado previamente por uma ferramenta de particionamento como o GParted.
+
Clicando a pequena seta irá Exibir pacotes opcionais, se disponíveis, que pode-se escolher para instalar em adição ao Haiku básico.
+
Recomendamos fazer uma última verificação, se escolheu o alvo correto antes de iniciar o processo de instalação. Clique em Definir partições... para abrir a Configuração de Unidade e dar uma olhada na nomeação e disposição dos volumes e partições disponíveis.
+
Começar inicia o procedimento de instalação, o qual basicamente copia tudo inclusive as pastas home/ e common/ para dentro do volume alvo e o torna inicializável.
At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the Onto: Please choose target menu and select Write boot sector from the Tools menu to make it bootable again.
-
The other item in the Tools menu is used to Set up a boot menu that puts a menu in the boot sector to choose what operating system to boot. See topic BootManager for more information.
- You don't need to run the BootManager if you already use a bootmanager like GRUB, in which case you have to add Haiku manually (see above), or Haiku runs exclusively on your machine.
No fim do procedimento de instalação, a partição torna-se automaticamente inicializável. Contudo, pode acontecer que outro sistema operacional ou ferramenta de particionamento (acidentalmente) sobrescreva o setor de inicialização do seu volume Haiku. Neste caso, inicialize seu CD de instalação e inicie o Instalador. Selecione sua partição de inicialização a partir do menu Para: Por favor escolha o alvo e selecione Escrever setor de inicialização do menu Ferramentas para torná-lo inicializável novamente.
+
O outro item no menu Ferramentas é utilizado para Configurar um menu de inicialização que põe um menu no setor de inicialização para escolher que sistema operacional inicializar. Veja o tópico Gerenciador de Inicialização para mais informações.
+Não é preciso executar o Gerenciador de Inicialização se já utiliza um gerenciador como o GRUB, neste caso adicione o Haiku manualmente (ver acima), ou se o Haiku executa exclusivamente em sua máquina.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Magnify
+
Ampliação
Deskbar:
Aplicativos
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/Magnify
Configurações:
~/config/settings/Magnify_prefs
-
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
A Ampliação exibe uma versão aumentada da área ao redor do ponteiro do mouse.
-
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 32x32 pixel square around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
-
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
-You can move the red outline with ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
-
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
-They can also be moved with ← / → / ↑ / ↓. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
-
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with OPT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
-
Clicking on the pop-up menu gives you a number of options:
+
No topo encontra-se o tamanho e nível de magnitude da área. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" significa que observa-se em um quadrado de 32x32 pixels ao redor do ponteiro do mouse e cada pixel é aumentado por um fator de 8.
+
Abaixo está a cor do pixel que é marcado por um contorno vermelho. Seua cor é apresentada como RGB e valor hexadecimal.
+Pode-se mover o contorno vermelho com ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
Para medir distâncias e alinhar objetos, pode-se adicionar até duas miras azuis com ALTH. Suas coordenadas X/Y para o canto superior esquerdo e, se ambos são adicionados, suas distâncias X/Y a partir um do outro, são mostrados no final.
+Eles também podem ser movidos com ← / → / ↑ / ↓. A linha ativa é marcada com um "x".
+
Pode-se mover o ponteiro do mouse, pixel por pixel, com OPT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
Clicar no menu pop-up oferece algumas opções:
-
Save image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a resource file.
-
Copy image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
-
Hide/Show info
ALTT
Toggles the display of all the additional information.
-
Add a crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
-
Remove a crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
-
Hide/Show grid
ALTG
Toggles the overlayed grid.
-
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Stops/continues updating the magnification area.
-
Stick coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.
-
Make square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
-
Decrease window size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
-
Increase window size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
-
Decrease pixel size
ALT,
Lowers magnification.
-
Increase pixel size
ALT.
Increases magnification.
+
Salvar imagem
ALTS
Salvar a exibição atual como um arquivo de recurso.
+
Copiar imagem
ALTC
Copia a exibição atual para a área de transferência.
+
Ocultar/Exibir informações
ALTT
Alterna a exibição de todas as informações adicionais.
+
Adicionar uma mira
ALTH
Adiciona uma mira que pode ser arrastada.
+
Remover uma mira
ALTSHIFTH
Remove a última mira adicionada.
+
Ocultar/Exibir grade
ALTG
Alterna a grade sobreposta.
+
Congelar/Descongelar imagem
ALTF
Para/continua atualizando a área de ampliação.
+
Fixar coordenadas
ALTI
Mantém atualizando a área de ampliação, mas não segue mais o ponteiro do mouse.
+
Tornar quadrado
ALT/
Volta a uma exibição quadrada após redimensionar a janela.
+
Diminuir tamanho da janela
ALT-
Encolhe a área ampliada ao redor do ponteiro do mouse.
+
Aumentar tamanho da janela
ALT+
Enlarguece a área ampliada ao redor do ponteiro do mouse.
~/config/settings/Mail/
-~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links/ - Objects put here appear in the mailbox' context menu
-~/config/settings/Mail/signatures/ - Location to store signatures
-~/config/settings/Mail/status/ - Location to store custom statuses
+~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links/ - Objetos colocados aqui aparecem no menu de contexto da caixa de correio
+~/config/settings/Mail/signatures/ - Local para armazenar assinaturas
+~/config/settings/Mail/status/ - Local para armazenar estados personalizados
-
Mail is Haiku's default viewer and editor of emails. It has nothing to do with the actual fetching and sending of mails, which is done by the mail_daemon and can be configured via the E-mail preferences.
-
This page is a general overview of the application Mail. For more information how email in Haiku works, refer to the Workshop on managing email.
+
Correio é o visualizador padrão e editor de correios eletrônicos do Haiku. ele nada tem a ver com busca e envio de correios, que é feito pelo daemon de correio e pode ser configurado através das preferências de Correio Eletrônico.
Dê um clique duplo num arquivo de correio eletrônico para abrí-lo no Correio. A interface é bem simples:
-
A menu and optional tool bar on top, with an area of the interesting attributes of a mail (to, from, subject, date) below that, and then the actual body of the mail. If the mail appears with strange characters or empty, try to change the Decoding from the pop-up menu.
-
If there are files attached to an email, they are listed at the end of the message. A right-click on one opens a context menu to Save attachment... or Open attachment. You can also drag & drop directly to the Desktop or another Tracker window.
-
Most of the menu and tool bar items are pretty self-explaining, so we'll concentrate just on the highlights.
+
Um menu e uma barra de ferramentas opcional no topo, com uma área dos atributos interessantes de um correio (para, de, assunto, data) abaixo dele, e então o corpo atual do correio. Se o correio aparecer com caracteres estranhos ou vazio, tente alterar a Decodificação a partir do menu pop-up.
+
Se existem arquivos anexados a um correio eletrônico, eles são listados ao fim da mensagem. Um clique com o botão direito do mouse em um arquivo abre um menu de contexto para Salvar anexo... ou Abrir anexo. Pode-se também arrastar e soltar diretamente para a Área de Trabalho ou outra janela do Rastreador.
+
A mairia dos itens do menu e da barra de ferramentas são bastante auto-explicativos, então nos concentraremos apenas nos destaques.
+
Arquivo
+
Quando fecha a janela de uma nova mensagem, seu estado é normalmente alterado de "Novo" para "Lido". Mas pode-se definir outros estados, selecionando do submenu Fechar e ... Lá encontra-se também a opção Definir para... para criar seus próprios estados personalizados, os quais são salvos em ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
-File
-
When you close the window of a new mail, its status is normally switched from "New" to "Read". But you can set other statuses as well, by choosing from the Close and... submenu. There you'll also find the option Set to... to create your own custom statuses, which are saved under ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
+Editar
+
Aqui encontrará um ítem para abrir as Preferências... do Correio (ver abaixo) e um atalho para gerenciar suas Contas..., o qual abrirá a janela de diálogo de preferências do Correio Eletrônico.
-Edit
-
Here you'll find an item to open Mail's Preferences... (see below) and a shortcut to manage your Accounts..., which will open the E-mail preference panel.
-
-View
-
You'll only seldomly need these two items, if at all:
+Ver
+
Precisar-se-á muito raramente destes dois itens, se em tudo:
-
Show header
ALTH
Shows the complete header of a mail, in case you need to track down the path of your mail, for example.
-
Show raw message
Displays a mail in its raw state, i.e. with all its control characters and without Mail's coloring of quotes or URLs, for example..
+
Exibir cabeçalho
ALTH
Exibe o cabeçalho completo de uma mensagem, no caso de precisar rastrear o caminho da sua mensagem, por exemplo.
+
Exibir mensagem base
Mostra uma mensagem em seu estado bruto, ou seja, com todos os seus caracteres de controle e sem a colorização de citações ou URLs, por exemplo.
-Message
-
The different options to reply to a mail may need a bit of explanation.
+Mensagem
+
A diferentes opções para responder a um correio podem necessitar de uma breve explicação.
-
Reply
ALTR
The standard reply to the server that has sent the mail to you. NOTE: In case of a mailing list post, this normally replies back to the mailing list, not just the person that wrote the post!
-
Reply to sender
OPTALTR
This on the other hand, sends directly and only to the person listed in the "From" attribute.
-
Reply to all
SHIFTALTR
Replies to the original sender plus all other (cc'ed) recipients of the original mail.
+
Responder
ALTR
A resposta padrão para o servidor que enviou a mensagem para você. NOTA: No caso de uma postagem de lista de discussão, isto normalmente replica de volta à lista, não apenas para a pessoa que escreveu a postagem!
+
Reponder ao remetente
OPTALTR
Este, por outro lado, envia diretamente para a pessoa listada no atributo "De".
+
Responder a todos
SHIFTALTR
Responde para o remetente original mais todos os outros destinatários (em cc:) da mensagem original.
-
If you mark a passage in the email before replying to it, only the marked text will be quoted in your answering mail. A nice way to cut down on excessive quoting, which is frowned upon by pretty much everybody...
-
The items to Forward, Resend and Copy to new are again pretty self-explaining.
-
When you've opened an email from a Tracker or query result window, Previous message and Next message will move to the previous/next email in the list.
-
Save address collects all email addresses from the header and the actual email body in a submenu. Choosing an address will open the People application in order to complete and save the contact information.
+
Se marcar uma passagem na mensagem antes de respondê-la, apenas o texto marcado será citado na sua mensagem de resposta. Um modo agradável para reduzir uma citação extensa, o qual é desaprovado pela maioria das pessoas...
+
Os itens de Encaminhar, Reenviar e Copiar para nova são novamente bastante auto-explicativas.
+
Quando tiver aberto uma mensagem a partir de um Rastreador ou janela de resultado de consulta, Mensagem anterior e Próxima mensagem irá mover para a anterior/próxima mensagem na lista.
+
Salvar endereço coleta todos os endereços de correio eletrônico do cabeçalho e o corpo da mensagem em um submenu. Escolhendo um endereço abrirá o aplicativo Pessoas de maneira a completar e salvar a informação do contato.
-Queries
-
This doesn't work yet, but is intended to hold queries that would show all mail related to the currently open mail, like all from the same sender or same subject/thread.
+Consultas
+
Isto não funciona ainda, mas planeja-se abrigar consultas que exibiriam todas as mensagens relacionadas à mensagem atualmente aberta, assim como todas a partir do mesmo remetente ou de mesmo assunto/encadeamento.
A new email is created by invoking the New mail message menu or the corresponding icon from the tool bar of an open email. Or you just start the Mail application or choose Create new message... from the context menu of the mailbox icon in the Deskbar.
Uma nova mensagem é criada chamando o menu Nova mensagem de correio ou pelo ícone correspondente a partir da barra de ferramentas de uma mensagem aberta. Ou apenas inicie o aplicativo de Correio ou escolha Criar nova mensagem... a partir do menu de contexto do ícone da caixa de correio na Deskbar.
-
The window is pretty similar to the one when reading mails. The menu and tool bar items are slightly different and the text boxes have to be filled with the recipient's email address, subject and so on, of course.
-
Cc is short for the anachronistic term "carbon copy" and results in copies of your mail being sent to the listed people. The difference to just listing a buch of addresses in the "To" field is, that you don't directly address the cc'ed people, thereby signaling that you probably don't expect an answer of them.
-Bcc means "blind carbon copy" which does practically the same as "Cc", but hides the recipients from each other.
-
You can enter several recipients by separating their addresses with a comma.
-To, CC, and BCC are pop-up menus. They contain all email addresses on your system found by a query for People files. Their "Group" attribute will sort them in corresponding submenus.
-
Again, we'll focus on the more interesting features in the menus.
-
-File
-
With Save as draft you can store your work so far and come back to it later. To load it again, choose it from the Open draft submenu that will list the result of a query for all mails with the status "Draft".
+
A janela é muito similar ao da leitura de mensagens. Os ítens do menu e da barra de ferramentas são ligeiramente diferentes e as caixas de texto devem ser preenchidas com o endereço do destinatário, assunto e assim por diante, naturalmente.
+
Cc é uma abreviatura para o termo anacrônico "com cópia" e resulta em cópias da sua mensagem sendo enviadas para as pessoas listadas. A diferença de apenas listar uma floresta de endereços no campo "Para" é que não se endereça diretamente para as pessoasi copiadas, assim sinalizando que provavelmente não espera uma resposta deles.
+Cco significa "com cópia oculta" o qual faz praticamente o mesmo que "Cc", mas oculta os destinatários dos demais.
+
Pode-se inserir vários destinatários separando seus endereços com uma vírgula.
+Para, CC, e CCO são menus pop-up. Eles contém todos os endereços de correio eletrônico no seu sistema encontrados por uma consulta aos arquivos do Pessoas. Seus atributos de "Grupo" os ordenarão em submenus correspondentes.
+
Novamente, iremos focar nas funcionalidades mais interessantes nos menus.
+
Arquivo
+
Com o Salvar como rascunho pode-se armazenar seu trabalho de até então e voltar a ele mais tarde. Para carregá-lo novamente, escolha-o a partir do submenu Abrir rascunho que listará o resultado de uma consulta a todas as mensagens com o estado "Rascunho".
-Edit
-
Quote and Remove quote or their respective shortcuts ALT← / → are used to add/remove a level of quoting by adjusting the number of ">" symbols in front of quoted lines. Just select some text in all the lines you want un/quoted and invoke the menu item.
+Editar
+
Citar e Remover citação ou seus respectivos atalhos ALT← / → são utilizados para adicionar/remover um nível de citação pelo ajuste do número de símbolos ">" na frente das linhas citadas. Apenas selecione algum texto em todas as linhas que deseja (ou não) citar e chame o ítem de menu.
-
Check spelling currently only offers corrections of English texts by marking wrong or unknown words red and showing them in italic.
-Right-clicking such a word opens a context menu offering suggestions to correct the word or to Add it to the accepted vocabulary.
-
Then, there are again the items to open Mail's Preferences... (see below) and a shortcut to managing your Accounts..., which will open the E-mail preference panel.
+
Verificar ortografia atualmente apenas oferece correções de textos em inglês marcando de vermelho palavras erradas ou desconhecidas e exibindo-as em itálico.
+Clicar com o botão direito do mouse numa palavra abre um menu de contexto oferecendo sugestões para corrigir a palavra ou para Adicionar ao vocabulário aceito.
+
Então, existem novamente os itens para abrir as Preferências... (veja abaixo) do Correio e um atalho para gerenciar suas Contas..., as quais irão abrir o painel de preferências do Correio Eletrônico.
-Message
-
With Add signature you can add predefined texts to the end of your mail. From its submenu you can choose a specific or Random one.
+Mensagem
+
Com Adicionar assinatura pode-se adicionar textos predefinidos ao fim de seu correio. A partir do seu submenu pode-se escolher uma assinatura específica ou Aleatória.
-
You create new or edit existing signatures with Edit signatures..., which will open a window where you enter the text itself and the title of your new sig. There, in the Signature menu, you find items to Open a specific signature or Save or Delete the currently loaded one, Signatures should be saved in ~/config/settings/Mail/signatures.
-
Use Add enclosure... and Remove enclosure to add/remove files as attachments. You can also drag & drop files from a Tracker window. Be careful though to drop those in the header section (To/From/Subject area at the top) or they'll get pasted into the email body if they are text files.
+
Cria-se assintauras novas ou edita-se existentes com Editar assinaturas..., o qual abrirá uma janela onde se insere o texto em si e o título da sua nova assintaura. Lá, no menu Assinatura, encontram-se itens para Abrir uma assinatura específica ou Salvar ou Eliminar a atualmente carregada. Assinaturas devem ser salvas em ~/config/settings/Mail/signatures.
+
Utilize Adicionar anexos... e Remover anexos para adicionar/remover arquivos como anexos. Pode-se também arrastar e soltar arquivos a partir de uma janela do Rastreador. Ainda assim, seja cuidadoso ao soltá-los na seção do cabeçalho (área do Para/De/Assunto no topo) ou eles serão colados dentro do corpo da mensagem se forem arquivos de texto.
-
File attachments are listed below the header section. You can remove a file by invoking a context menu or by selecting it and pressing DEL.
+
Arquivos anexados são listados abaixo da seção do cabeçalho. Pode-se remover um arquivo ao chamar um menu de contexto ou selecionando-o e teclando DEL.
-Queries
-
This doesn't work yet, but is intended to hold queries that would show all mail related to the currently open mail, like all to the same recipient or same subject/thread.
+Consultas
+
Isto não funciona ainda, mas está planejado para manter consultas que deveriam exibir todos os correios relacionados ao correio atualmente aberto, como todos para o mesmo destinatário ou mesmo assunto/objetivo.
Options to show labels under the icons or hide the tool bar completely.
-
Font
Sets the type of font used for the email text.
-
Size
Sets the font size.
-
Colored quotes
Colors different levels of quotation.
-
Initial spell check mode
Turns the spell checker on/off on startup.
-
Automatically mark mail as read
If you close an email with the Status "New", you can have it automatically marked as "Read".
+
Barra de botões
Opções para exibir rótulos sob os ícones ou ocultar a barra de ferramentas completamente.
+
Fonte
Define o tipo de fonte utilizado para o texto da mensagem.
+
Tamanho
Define o tamanho da fonte.
+
Citações coloridas
Colore diferentes níveis de citação.
+
Modo de verificação ortográfica inicial
Liga/desliga a verificação de ortografia na inicialização.
+
Marcar automaticamente correio como lido
Se fechar uma mensagem com o estado "Novo", o terá automaticamente marcado como "Lido".
-Mailing
+Correspondência
-
Default account
If you have several email accounts, this specifies which to use by default when creating a new message.
-
Reply account
When you reply to a mail, you can either always Use default account set in the pop-up menu above, or use the Account from mail, which will send the mail from the same account that received the original message.
-
Reply preamble
This is inserted before the quoted text in your reply. You can use various variables from the pop-up menu next to the text field. Example: "Hello %n!\n\nOn %d you wrote:\n" produces this:
-
Hello Dr. Hawking!
+
Conta padrão
Se tiver muitas contas de correio eletrônico, isto especifica qual utilizar por padrão quando criar uma nova mensagem.
+
Conta de resposta
Quando responder uma mensagem, pode sempre também Utilizar conta padrão definida no menu pop-up acima, ou utilizar Conta do correio, o qual enviará a mensagem a partir da mesma conta que recebeu a mensagem original.
+
Preâmbulo de resposta
Isto é inserido antes do texto citado na sua resposta. Pode-se utilizar diversas variáveis a partir do menu pop-up próximo ao campo de texto. Exemplo: "Olá %n!\n\nEm %d você escreveu:\n" produz isto:
+
Olá Dr. Hawking!
-On Mon, 18 Jan 1998 02:55:16 +0800 you wrote:
+Em Mon, 18 Jan 1998 02:55:16 +0800 você escreveu:
> so thanks again for the inspiration concerning the cosmological constant.
> ...and the rest of the quoted text following...
-
Auto signature
Adds a signature automatically to the end of the mail.
-
Encoding
Sets the default encoding.
-
Warn unencodable
If your mail contains characters that can't be encoded with the currently set encoding method, you can turn on being warned about that. That gives you the opportunity to change the encoding before sending. Otherwise unencodable characters are replaced by rectangle symbols.
-
Text wrapping
Inserts line-breaks every 76 characters which makes mails easier to read.
-
Attach attributes
You can choose to send BFS' attributes of a file alongside the attachments. This is nice for other Haiku users, as they'll get a "complete" file (think artist, album, title attributes of MP3 files), but may cause confusion (or even suspicion) with others, who will wonder what the additional "BeOS Attributes" attachment might be...
-Should you opt not to send attributes with your attachments, remember zip up your files before you send them or you'll strip away BFS attributes.
+
Auto assinatura
Adiciona uma assinatura automaticamente no final da mensagem.
+
Codificação
Define a codificação padrão.
+
Alertar não codificável
Se sua mensagem contém caracteres que não podem ser codificados com o método de condificação atualmente definido, pode-se ativá-lo para alertar sobre isso. O que dá a oportunidade para alterar a codificação antes de enviar. Do contrário, caracteres não codificáveis serão substituídos por símbolos retangulares.
+
Quebra de texto
Insere quebras de linha a cada 76 caracteres, o que torna as mensagens fáceis de ler.
+
Atributos do anexo
Pode-se escolher enviar atributos do BFS de um arquivo junto com os anexos. Isto é bom para outros usuários do Haiku, pois receberão um arquivo "completo" (como atributos de artista, álbum, título de arquivos MP3), mas pode causar confusão (ou ainda suspeita) em outros, que irão pensar o que devem ser os anexos adicionais de "Atributos BeOS"...
+Caso opte por não enviar atributos com seus anexos, lembre-se de compactar seus arquivos antes de enviá-los ou perderá os atributos BFS.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
Tocador de Mídia
@@ -80,51 +81,51 @@
Reprodução de áudio e vídeo
MeuFilme.Ingles.srt
MeuFilme.Frances.srt
Faixas de áudio múltiplas, muito frequentemente utilizadas por vários idiomas dentro de um único arquivo de vídeo, estão disoníveis a partir do submenu Faixa de áudio. O submernu Vídeo | Faixa oferece o mesmo quando existem múltiplas transmissões de vpideo disponíveis.
-
You can toggle the Full screen mode (ALTENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with Hide interface (ALTH or a double right-click) or have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
+
Pode-se fixar o modo Tela cheia (ALTENTER ou F ou um clique duplo com o botão esquerdo do mouse), ocultar as bordas da janela e os controles do Tocador de Mídia with Ocultar interface (ALTH ou um duplo clique com o botão direito do mouse) ou ter sua janela Sempre no topo (ALTA).
-
Playlists
-
MediaPlayer | Playlist... (ALTP) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
Listas de Reprodução
+
Tocador de Mídia | Lista de Reprodução... (ALTP) abre uma janela com os arquivos atualmente listados para reprodução. O clique duplo em uma entrada faz com que comece a tocar.
-
You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the Edit menu you can Randomize or Remove (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with Move to Trash (ALTT).
-
Of course, you can Save a playlist and later Open it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
+
Pode-se adicionar mais arquivos soltando-os dentro da lista e rearranjando sua posição via arrastar e soltar. A patir do menu Editar pode-se Randomizar ou Remover (DEL) uma entrada da lista ou eliminar o arquivo atual com Mover para o Lixo (ALTT).
+
Naturalmente, pode-se Salvar uma lista de reprodução e mais tarde Abrir novamente, ou iniciá-la simplesmente com um duplo clique no arquivo da lista de reprodução.
-
Settings
-
There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
Definições
+
Existem muitas definições para o ajuste fino do comportamento do Tocador de Mídia:
-
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
-
Next are different View options.
-You can opt to Use hardware overlay if available, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
-You can Scale movies smoothly (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
-Scale controls in full-screen mode if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
-Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of window, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
-
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at Full volume, at less confusing Low volume or quietly Muted.
+
A primeira parte, Modo de reprodução, é bastante autoexplicativo. Iniciar reprodução automaticamente, fechar janelas quando terminar ou reproduzir clipes continuamente.
+
Os próximos são diferentes Opções de visualização.
+Pode-se optar por Usar sobreposição de hardware se disponível, o qual reduz o uso da CPU mas funciona para apenas uma janela de vídeo e necessita do driver de uma placa de vídeo suportada.
+Pode-se Escalar filmes suavemente (quando não está em modo de sobreposição) o qual utiliza filtragem ultrarrápida para suavizar ao invés de quadricular os pixels quando ampliando o vídeo ou assistindo em modo de tela cheia.
+Escalar controles em modo de tela cheia se preferir controles ligeiramente maiores, talvez por que veja a tela de muito longe em modo de tela cheia.
+Existem, então, definições para Tamanho da legenda e Localização da legenda. Eles podem ser exibidos no Final do vídeo, o qual irá sempre tê-los sobrepostos sobre a imagem. Ou Final da janela, o qual permite redimensionar a janela verticalmente e ter, inversamente, as legendas aparecendo na barra preta no final.
+
a última definição determina o volume de áudio dos clipes cujas janelas não estão atualmente ativas. Pode-se tê-las todas tocando em Volume total, no menos confuso Volume baixo ou silenciosamente Mudo.
-
Keyboard controls
-
MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+
Controles de teclado
+
O Tocador de Mídia oferece convenientes combinações de teclas para controlar a reprodução sem utilizar o mouse.
-
Z
Skip to previous track
-
X
Play
-
C
Pause
-
V
Stop
-
B
Skip to next track
+
Z
Pular para a faixa anterior
+
X
Tocar
+
C
Pausar
+
V
Parar
+
B
Pular para a próxima faixa
-
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+
Estas teclas são atribuídas para as funções de botões de controle. Elas são sempre as teclas de letras na parte inferior esquerda do teclado, ou seja, são utilizadas independentemente do seu atual mapeamento de teclado. As teclas acima correspondem ao mapa de teclado US americano padrão.
-
→
Seek forwards
-
SHIFT→
Jump forwards 10 seconds
-
ALT→
Jump forwards 30 seconds
-
←
Seek backwards
-
SHIFT←
Jump backwards 10 seconds
-
ALT←
Jump backwards 30 seconds
+
→
Procurar adiante
+
SHIFT→
Pular adiante 10 segundos
+
ALT→
Pular adiante 30 segundos
+
←
Procurar para trás
+
SHIFT←
Pular para trás 10 segundos
+
ALT←
Pular para trás 30 segundos
-
↑
Increase volume
-
↓
Decrease volume
+
↑
Aumentar o volume
+
↓
Diminuir o volume
-
ALT↑
Skip to previous Track
-
ALT↓
Skip to next Track
+
ALT↑
Pular para a faixa anterior
+
ALT↓
Pular para a próxima faixa
-
Spacebar
Toggle play/pause
-
ALTENTER
Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area)
+
Spacebar
Alternar tocar/pausar
+
ALTENTER
Alternar para modo de tela cheia (também feito pelo duplo clique na área de vídeo)
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
MidiPlayer
+
Tocador de Midi
Deskbar:
Aplicativos
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/MidiPlayer
Configurações:
~/config/settings/MidiPlayerSettings
-
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback midi music files. Midi files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
-While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
-
Haiku doesn't come with a SoundFont installed, because they are so large and only few people generally need one. Most of those who do, already have high quality or custom SoundFonts. To be able to at least hear something you can install a free one from an optional package. In Terminal, enter: installoptionalpackage TimGMSoundFont
-
To use any other SoundFont, create a link to it in /boot/system/data/synth and name it big_synth.sy.
+
Como o nome sugere, o Tocador de Midi é utilizado para reproduzir arquivos de música midi. Arquivos midi são especiais, como eles não contém a música realmente digitalizado e em alguns casos codificada, mas apenas uma descrição dela: Mantenha esta nota para aquele trecho com este volume e use o instrumento X.
+Enquanto isto mantém o tamanho do arquivo bem pequeno, também significa que dependendo da biblioteca de instrumentos (a tão falada "Fonte de Sons") o resultado pode diferenciar enormemente. Igualmente, estas Fontes de Sons tendem a ser bastante grandes, cada vez mais com o número e a qualidade das amostras de instrumentos.
+
O Haiku não vem com uma Fonte de Sons instalada, porque são muito grandes e apenas poucas pessoas precisam de uma. A maioria das que as utilizam, já tem Sontes de Sons de alta qualidade ou personalizadas. Para ser capaz de ao menos ouvir algo pode-se instalar uma livre a partir de um pacote opcional. No Terminal, digite: installoptionalpackage TimGMSoundFont
+
Para usar qualquer outra Fonte de Sons, crie um vínculo para ela em /boot/system/data/synth e nomeei-a big_synth.sy.
-
MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the Reverb pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
+
A interface do Tocador de Midi é muito simples. Apenas dê um duplo clique ou arraste e solte um arquivo midi e a reprodução começa. Vontrole o volume com o botão deslizante e adicione efeitos de reverberação a partir do menu pop-up Reverberação. Ativar o scope irá exibir uma visualização em forma de um osciloscópio executando no topo.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
PackageInstaller
+
Instalador de Pacotes
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally launched via
-double-clicking a supported file.
+
Deskbar:
Sem entrada, normalmente carregado via duplo clique em um arquivo suportado.
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/PackageInstaller
Configurações:
nenhuma
-
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
-
PackageInstaller is a software installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
-
It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
Esta página é atualmente apenas um rascunho inicial. Por favor, volte posteriormente para ver uma versão refinada.
+
O Instalador de Pacotes é um instalador de software para pacotes do BeOS em formato PKG. Ele proporciona uma interface gráfica fácil de usar que ajuda na instalação rápida de pacotes no Haiku.
+
É executado automaticamente quando tenta abrir pacotes com a extensão .pkg.
-
The main window gives access to two configurations:
+
A janela principal dá acesso a duas configurações:
-
installation type (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option)
-
Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths)
+
tipo de instalação (dependendo do desenvolvedor pode existir mais do uma opção (padrão) de instalação)
+
Local da Instalação (apenas partições inteiras/discos rígidos podem ser escolhidos, e não caminhos personalizados)
-
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
Após clicar em Instalar o processo de extração e instalação começará.
-
At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
-
When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
+
Neste ponto avisos e erros podem aparecer dizendo quais bibliotecas e dependências faltam para que possa executar o programa. É necessário instalar estes pacotes antes de tentar instalar o programa desejado.
+
Quando a instalação está completa, o pacote deve aparecer no menu de aplicativos da Deskbar.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Screenshot
+
Captura de Tela
Deskbar:
Aplicativos
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/Screenshot
@@ -63,21 +65,21 @@
~/config/settings/screenshot
-
Screenshots are taken by either starting the Screenshot application or by pressing the PRINT key,
+
Capturas de tela são obtidas tanto ao iniciar o aplicativo Captura de Tela como pressionando a tecla PRINT,
-
In the Screenshot panel you can toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window and decide if the window border and mouse pointer should be included. You can also enter a delay before a screenshot is taken.
-
Below that you set the name, format and location for the screenshot that will be used when you click Save. Instead of saving the file to disk you can also decide to Copy to clipboard to be able to paste the shot directly into another application, or take a New screenshot.
-
All settings are remembered the next time you take a screenshot, enabling these convenient keyboard shortcuts:
+
Na janela de diálogo da Captura de Tela pode-se alternar entre obter a tela inteira ou apenas a janela ativa e decidir se o borda da janela e o ponteiro do mouse devem ser incluídos. Pode-se também inserir um atraso antes de obter uma captura.
+
Abaixo defina o nome, formato e local para a captura, que será usado quando clicar em Salvar. Ao invés de salvar o arquivo no disco, pode-se decidir por Copiar para a área de transferência para ser capaz de colar a captura diretamente em outro aplicativo, ou obter uma Nova captura de tela.
+
Todas as definições são lembradas na próxima vez que obter uma captura, habilitando estas convenientes teclas de atalho:
-
PRINT
Takes a screenshot with zero delay and launches the Screenshot panel.
-
SHIFTPRINT
Takes a screenshot silently (without opening the panel), while still respecting the last used settings.
-
CTRLPRINT
Also takes a screenshot silently with the saved settings, but instead of saving it as a file, it's just copied to the clipboard.
+
PRINT
Obtém uma captura de tela com atraso zero e carrega a janela de diálogo da Captura de Tela.
+
SHIFTPRINT
Obtém uma captura de tela silenciosamente (sem abrir a janela de diálogo), enquanto ainda respeita as últimas definições utilizadas.
+
CTRLPRINT
Também obtém uma captura de tela silenciosamente com as definições salvas, mas ao invés de salvá-la como um arquivo, apenas copia para a área de transferência.
-Taking a screenshot from Terminal
-
There's a special screenshot application to be used from Terminal or a script.
-screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
+Obtendo uma captura de tela a partir do Terminal
+
Existe um aplicativo especial screenshot para ser utilizado a partir do Terminal ou de um script.
+screenshot --help exibe as conhecidas opções como parâmetros:
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
ShowImage
+
Exibir Imagem
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally launched via
-double-clicking a supported file.
+
Deskbar:
Sem entrada, normalmente carregado via duplo clique em um arquivo suportado.
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
Configurações:
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
-
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.
-ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
-
Viewing
+
Exibir Imagem permite ver imagens em todos os formatos que são suportados através dos Tradutores de Dados. Novos formatos são automaticamente reconhecidos quando seu tradutor é adicionado ao sistema. Isto é feito para arquivos de ícones vetoriais do Haiku, imagens do WonderBrush ou quando imagens WebP tornam-se disponíveis, por exemplo.
+Exibir Imagem proporciona funcionalidades de edição mínimas para cortas, rotacionar e inverter imagens e para salvá-las em outro formato.
+
Visualização
-
The View menu offers to start a Slide show of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a Slide delay from 2 to 20 seconds.
-
Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
-Original size shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
-Fit to window shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
-Zoom in and Zoom out move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
-
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
-High quality zooming applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
-Stretch to window will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
-
Then there's a Full screen mode with an option to Show caption in full screen mode which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
-
Lastly, Show tool bar will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
O menu Visualizar permite iniciar um Slide show de todas as imagens em uma pasta (ou janela de resultado de consulta) e definir um Atraso de slide de 2 a 20 segundos.
+
Outros comandos aplicados à imagem atualmente mostrada (sem alterar o tamanho da janela):
+Tamanho original exibe a imagem com um fator de aproximação de 100%.
+Ajustar à janela encolhe a imagem dentro do quadro da janela, isto é após ter aproximado dentro dele ou após redimensionar a janela.
+Aproximar e Afastar aproxima ou afasta a imagem em etapas de 10%. A aproximação também é feita com a roda do mouse; para rotacionar horizontalmente uma imagem maior do que a janela, simplesmente clique com o botão esquerdo e arraste o mouse.
+
Duas definições não se aplicam apenas à imagem atualmente exibida e são lembradas ao navegar de uma imagem para a próxima:
+Aproximação em alta qualidade aplica um filtro muito rápido ao aproximar para reduzir linhas denteadas e produzir um resultado mais suave.
+Esticar para a janela esticará imagens menores para preencher o quadro da janela atual.
+
E há um modo Tela cheia com uma opção para Exibir legenda no modo de tela cheia a qual sobrepõe o nome do arquivo na parte inferior da imagem.
+
Por último, Exibir barra de ferramentas irá exibir/ocultar os controles gráficos:
-
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out.
-
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
+
Da esquerda para a direita: Imagem anterior, próxima imagem, iniciar show de slides (em modo de tela cheia), modo de seleção, tamanho original, ajustar para janela, aproximar, afastar.
+
Muitos dos comandos mais frequentemente utilizados também estão disponíveis a partir de um menu de contexto acionado pelo clique com o botão direito do mouse sobre a imagem. Conveniente quando em modo de tela cheia.
Navegando
-
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
-
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
-
Looking at the Browse menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like First page and Next page let you navigate those pages.
-
Editing
+
Após abrir uma imagem pode-se rapidamente navegar através de todas as imagens na sua pasta (ou janela de resultado de consulta) pressionando ↑/↓ ou ←/→. Pode-se ver na janela do Rastreador a seleção mudar de acordo.
+
Existe uma maneira rápida para abrir a pasta de uma imagem atual e então navegar pela sua principal e subpastas. Ela funciona semelhantemente à navegação de pesquisa no Rastreador pelo clique na área de informação na barra de estado que exibe tamanho e formato da imagem atual.
+
Olhar no menu Navegar, exibe outro tipo de navegação: Alguns formatos de imagem, como o TIFF, podem conter muita páginas em um arquivo. Comandos como Primeira página e Próxima página permitem navegar por aquelas páginas.
+
Editando
-
The Image menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
-
Use as backgroud... will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
-
Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to Selection mode from the Edit menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
-Clear selection or ESC will remove the selection box.
-
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
-
Saving and converting
-
To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal Save as... item from the File menu, select the format and choose a file name.
-Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+
O menu Imagem oferece umas poucas manipulações de imagem necessárias para um visualizador de imagem: rotacionar e inverter a imagem. Observe, contudo, que a imaem real não será alterada. Apenas um atributo é adicionado ao arquivo, então ele será exibido rotacionado ou invertido da próxima vez que for aberto.
+
Utilizar como papel de parede... irá abrir as preferências do Papel de parede para definir a imagem atual como fundo de seus espaços de trabalho.
+
Cortar é outra funcionalidade necessária algumas vezes. Para definir o quadro para cortar, pode-se alternar para Modo de seleção a partir do menu Editar e arrastar uma caixa com o botão esquerdo do mouse. Se não deseja alterar os modos primeiro, pode criar esta caixa no "modo normal" simplesmente segurando CTRL enquanto arrasta com o botão esquerdo, o que de outra maneira apenas rotacionaria horizontalmente a imagem.
+Limpar seleção ou ESC removerá a caixa de seleção.
+
O capítulo seguinte exibe como realmente salvar uma área recortada.
+
Salvando e convertendo
+
Para salvar ou converter uma imagem em qualquer formato disponível, pode-se chamar o item normal Salvar como... a partir do menu Arquivo, selecionar o formato e escolher um nome de arquivo.
+Frequentemente mais rápido, especialmente quando a janela do Rastreador com a pasta de destino já está aberta, é usar o arrastar e soltar.
-
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
-
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
+
Esta é também a forma como o recorte acima mencionado é finalizado. Também selecione um quadro como descrito acima, ou escolha Editar | Selecionar tudo para a imagem inteira. Então arraste e solte a seleção na Área de Trabalho ou alguma janela do Rastreador para criar uma nova imagem do recorte no mesmo formato da imagem original.
+
Para salvar em outro formato de arquivo, arraste como botão direito do mouse e escolha um formato do menu de contexto quando soltar a imagem.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
StyledEdit
@@ -62,9 +64,9 @@
-
If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+
Caso interesse, isto é o que aqueles atributos adicionais mostram quando examinados no Terminal com listattr:
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
Type Size Name
@@ -76,10 +78,10 @@
-
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
-
Because these attributes are a file system feature of BFS, this means that not only other platforms just see a plain text file, it also follows, that the formatting will be lost when a file is stored on a non-BFS partition. The above attributes are simply stripped and what's left is the ordinary, plain text file.
-
In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
-
Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the Font menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the Document menu only work on the whole file.
+
Como pode ver, todas as opções de formatação do menu do StyledEdit estão presentes: quebra de linha (ligado/desligado) e alinhament0 (esquerdo/centralizado/direito), cada um em um atributo. Os estilos (fonte, tamanho, cor) de cada letra espremidos dentro de outros.
+
Devido ao fato destes atributos serem uma funcionalidade de sistema de arquivos do BFS, isto significa que as outras plataformas não apenas vêem um arquivo de texto simples, como também a formatação será perdida quando um arquivo é armazenado em uma partição não-BFS. Os atributos acima são simplesmente removidos e o que permanece é o arquivo de texto simples comum.
+
Em todo caso, é uma boa ideia ter a possibilidade de texto colorido em diferentes fontes e tamanhos enquanto ainda é um arquivo de texto normal. Um LeiaMe.txt, por exemplo, é portanto legível em um shell em qualquer plataforma e ainda ter um pouco de estilo quando visto através de um duplo clique a partir do Haiku.
+
Uma vez que utilizar o StyledEdit é tão simples, iremos pular a explicação de todos os itens de menu mundanos. Apenas escreva seu texto então selecione as palvras que deseja formatar e aplique a fonte, o tamanho e a cor a partir do menu Fonte. Quebra de linha e alinhamento a partir do menu Documento funciona somente no arquivo inteiro.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with ALTT.
+
Pode-se abrir quantos Terminais forem necessários, também cada um em sua própria janela simplesmente carregando mais Terminais ou com ALTN a partir de um Terminal já aberto. Ou utilizar a visão em guias do Terminal e abrir mais guias com ALTT.
-
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
-By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
-Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
-
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
-
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
-
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
+
Duplo clique dentro de uma parte vazia da barra de guias abre uma nova guia; dentro de uma guia abre um diálogo para renomear seu título. Existem muitas variáveis %-designadas que são explicadas com uma dica quando paira o mouse sobre o campo de texto.
+Por padrão, %1d: %p, uma guia exibe o diretório atual e, separado por :, o nome do processo atualmente em execução (ou -- se apenas o bash está executando, provavelmente ocioso). A captura de tela acima exibe a primeira guia com uma sessão FTP na pasta Área de Trabalho e a segunda guia ociosa na home.
+Através de Editar | Título da janela... o título da janela do Terminal pode ser editado de maneira similar.
+
Clicar com o botão direito do mouse em uma guia exibe um menu de contexto para Fechar guia, Fechar outras guias ou, como o duplo clique, Editar título da guia....
+
Uma janela do Terminal pode ser redimensionada como qualquer outra janela ou usando as predefinições a partir do menu Definções | Tamanho da janela. ALTENTER alterna para o modo de tela cheia.
+
O tamanho de janela e codificação de texto alterados são mantidos apenas escolhendo Definições | Salvar como padrão.
Settings | Settings... opens a panel to configure the standard settings of a Terminal.
+
Definições | Definições... abre uma janela de diálogo para configurar as definições padrão de um Terminal.
-
It starts off with the "formulas" for naming tab and window titles. Again, tooltips show the available variables. Below that you set font type, font size and the different text and background colors. You can choose a pre-defined color schema like Black on white or White on black or create a Custom one using the color picker below.
-Activate the checkbox to Confirm exit if active programs exist and you'll be warned when trying to close a Terminal window while an app is still being executed.
-You can save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
-Pressing OK will save the current settings as default.
+
Ele começa com as "fórmulas" para nomear os títulos da guia e da janela. Novamente, dicas exibem as variáveis disponíveis. Abaixo dele define-se o tipo e o tamanho da fonte e as diferentes cores para texto e fundo. Pode-se escolher um esquema de cor predefinido como Preto sobre branco ou Branco sobre preto ou criar um Personalizado utilizando seletor de cores abaixo.
+Ative a caixa de verificação para Confirmar saída se existem programas ativos e será alertado quando tentra fechar uma janela do Terminal enquanto um aplicativo estiver ainda sendo executado.
+Pode-se salvar diferentes definições como perfis separados, os quais com um duplo clique abrem um Terminal configurado de acordo.
+Pressionar OK salvará as definições atuais como padrão.
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
-Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/common/etc/.
Vindo do Unix, existem incontáveis possibilidades para personalizar o próprio bash. Existem dois arquivos que são especialmente importantes para o usuário: .profile e .inputrc.
+Ambos podem ser criados na pasta home/ e adicionar ou sobrepor os padrões do sistema que são definidos em /boot/common/etc/.
.profile
-
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
-
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
+
O .profile é carregado toda vez que se abre um novo Terminal. Ele define todos os tipos de apelidos e variáveis que afetarão o comportamento e a aparência do bash. Você encontrará muitos recursos online que detalharão todas as possibilidades.
+
O Haiku/BeOS Tip Server tem algumas dicas para que possa começar, por exemplo:
The .inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
+
O .inputrc mexe com combinação de teclas. Uma vez que o Haiku proporciona padrões úteis, provavelmente não precisa se atrapalhar com estas definições mais complicadas. Se possui necessidades especiais aqui, consulte um dos muitos recursos online, por exemplo The GNU Readline Library.
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
Arrastar um arquivo ou pasta de uma janela do Rastreador para o Terminal inserirá seu caminho no local do cursor. Arrastar com o botão direito do mouse oferece ações adicionais em um menu de contexto:
-
Insert path
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.
-
Change directory
Changes to the folder of the dragged file.
-
Create link here
Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.
-
Move here
Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
-
Copy here
Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Inserir caminho
Insere o local do arquivo, o mesmo que o arrastar e soltar com o botão esquerdo do mouse.
+
Alterar diretório
Alterna para a pasta do arquivo arrastado.
+
Criar vínculo aqui
Cria um vínculo para o arquivo arrastado no diretório atualmente acessado pelo Terminal.
+
Mover aqui
Move o arquivo arrastado para dentro do diretório atualmente acessado pelo Terminal.
+
Copiar aqui
Copia o arquivo arrastado dentro do diretório atualmente acessado pelo Terminal.
-
You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
+
Pode-se abrir qualquer arquivo com seu aplicativo preferido com o comando open [nomedoarquivo]. Isto também funciona com a representação da pasta atual (".") e pai ("..") o qual então abre numa janela do Rastreador. Então, para abrir o diretório atual, digite:
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
TextSearch
+
Pesquisa de Texto
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally launched via Tracker Add-on
+
Deskbar:
Nenhuma entrada, normalmente carregado via Adicional do Rastreador
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/TextSearch
Configurações:
~/config/settings/TextSearch
-
TextSearch procura por uma string em arquivos de texto. Tipicamente é invocado do menu de contexto Tracker's Add-on na seleção de arquivos ou pastas em que você deseja procurar.
+
A Pesquisa de Texto procura por uma sequeência em arquivos de texto. Tipicamente é chamado a partir do menu de contexto Adicional do Rastreador, na seleção de arquivos ou pastas em que deseje pesquisar.
-
You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit RETURN or click Search to start. If Show lines is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.
+
Entre com uma sequência de pesquisa na caixa de texto no topo e aperte RETURN ou clique Pesquisar para começar. Se Exibir linhas está marcado, os resultados são automaticamente expandidos para exibir as linhas do arquivo contendo a sequência de pesquisa.
-
Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:
+
Apenas umas poucas palavras sobre alguns dos itens de menu não tão autoexplicativos:
-
File menu
-
New window
ALTN
Opens a new window where you can enter another string and search through the same files/folders.
+
Menu arquivo
+
Nova janela
ALTN
Abre uma nova janela onde pode-se inserir uma outra sequência e pesquisar através dos mesmos arquivos/diretórios.
-
Set target...
ALTF
Lets you choose a new set of files and folders to search through.
-
Action menu
-
Trim selection
ALTT
Removes all entries from the list that are not currently selected.
-
Open selection
ALTO
Opens the currently selected files with their preferred application (same as a double-click). If it's a text editor supporting it (like Pe), you can jump to the exact line the search string was found.
-
Open files in Tracker
ALTK
Opens the location of the currently selected files in Tracker.
-
Copy text to clipboard
ALTB
Copies the current selection to the clipboard.
-
Settings menu
-
Skip folders starting with a dot
This is useful when working in a "unixy" environment, where often administrative files are hidden inside ".folders/". Source versioning systems like SVN and CVS are examples of applications using this and are also widely used in Haiku.
-
Escape search text
TextSearch uses the command line tool grep. For it, special characters like '"*\$?! and spaces have to be escaped with a \. Deactivating this setting means you have to do this yourself, but in exchange grants you the power of regular expressions.
-
Text files only
TextSearch is currently only useful for finding strings in plain text files. Deactivating this setting will have it look through any kind of file anyway.
-
History menu
-
Contains recently used search strings.
-
Encoding menu
-
Lets you choose different character encodings if needed.
+
Definir alvo...
ALTF
Permite escolher um novo conjunto de arquivos e pastas para pesquisar.
+
Menu ação
+
Restringir seleção
ALTT
Remove todas a entradas da lista que não está selecionada atualmente.
+
Abrir seleção
ALTO
Abre os arquivos atualmente selecionados com seus aplicativos preferidos (o mesmo que um duplo clique). Se for um editor de texto que suporte (como o Pe), pode-se pular para a linha exata em que a sequência pesquisada foi encontrada.
+
Abrir arquivos no Rastreador
ALTK
Abre o local dos arquivos atualmente selecionados no Rastreador.
+
Copiar texto para a área de trabalho
ALTB
Copia a seleção atual para a área de transferência.
+
Menu definições
+
Saltar pastas iniciando com um ponto
Isto é útil quando trabalhando num ambiente "unixy", onde geralmente arquivos administrativos são ocultos dentro de ".pastas/". Sistemas de versionamento de código-fonte como SVN e CVS são exemplos de aplicativos que utilizam isto e são também largamente utilizados no Haiku.
+
Escapar pesquisa de texto
A Pesquisa de Texto utiliza a ferramenta de linha de comando grep. Para ele, caracteres especiais como '"*\$?! e espaços tem que ser escapados com uma \. Desativar esta definição significa que é preciso fazer isto manualmente, mas em troca garante o poder das expressões regulares.
+
Somente arquivos de texto
A Pesquisa de Texto é atualmente apenas útil para encontrar sequências em arquivos de texto simples. Desativar esta definição a fará procurar através de qualquer tipo de arquivo.
+
Menu Histórico
+
Contém sequências de pesquisa recentemente usadas.
+
Menu Codificação
+
Permite escolher diferentes codificações de caracteres se necessário.
The Deskbar is the little panel that by default is located in the upper right corner of the screen. It's Haiku's version of Windows' taskbar with its Start button. It contains the Deskbar menu from where you can start applications and preferences, a tray with a clock and other tools below that and a list of currently running programs at the bottom.
+
A Deskbar é o pequeno painel que por padrão está localizado no canto superior direito da tela. É a versão do Haiku para a barra de tarefas do Windows com seu botão Iniciar. Ele contém o menu da Deskbar de onde pode-se iniciar aplicativos e preferências, uma bandeja com um relógio e outras ferramentas abaixo dele e uma lista dos programas atualmente em execução, mais abaixo.
-
You can move the Deskbar to any corner or as a bar along the upper or lower border of the screen by gripping the knobbly area on one side of the tray and drag&drop it into the new position. You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag&dropping the knobbly area onto the Deskbar menu.
+
Pode-se mover a Deskbar para qualquer canto ou como uma barra ao longo da borda superior ou inferior da tela segurando a área pontilhada em um dos lados da bandeja e arrastar e soltá-la na nova posição. Pode-se também comprimí-la em uma disposição mais compacta arranstando e soltando a área pontilhada dentro do menu da Deskbar.
Show replicants - Shows/hides the little Replicant widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.
-
Mount - Offers the same options as when invoked by right-clicking the Desktop (see Mounting Volumes).
-
Deskbar preferences... - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).
-
Shutdown - Offers options to either Restart system or Power off.
-
Recent documents, folders, applications - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see Deskbar preferences below).
-
Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, Preferences - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences. You can add links to other programs (or any folder, document, query etc.) by putting them into ~/config/be.
Mostrar replicantes - Exibe/oculta o pequeno dispositivo Replicante widget podendo ser usado para arrastar, remover ou acessar seu menu de contexto.
+
Montar - Oferece as mesmas opções como quando invocadas pelo clique no Desktop com o botão direito do mouse (veja Montando Volumes).
+
Preferências da Deskbar... - Abre um painel para configurar a Deskbar (veja abaixo).
+
Desligar - Oferece opções tanto para Reiniciar o sistema ou Desligar.
+
Documentos recentes, pastas, aplicativos - Lista dos documentos, pastas e aplicativos abertos recentemente (veja Preferências da Deskbar abaixo).
+
Aplicativos, Demonstrações, Miniaplicativos da Deskbar, Preferências - Lista dos aplicativos instalados, demonstrações, miniaplicativos e preferências. Pode-se adicionar vínculos para outros programas colocando-os dentro de ~/config/settings/deskbar.
-Deskbar Preferences
-
-
-
Menu
-Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
-The button Edit menu... opens the folder /boot/home/config/be/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, and Preferences.
-You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
-
It's even easier to simply drag a file, folder or saved query and drop it where you want it into the Deskbar.
-
Window
-
-
Always on top
The Deskbar always stays above all other windows.
-
Auto-raise
The Deskbar pops to the front if the mouse pointer touches it.
-
Auto-hide
The Deskbar is reduced to only a few pixels and only pops up if the mouse pointer touches them.
-
-
Applications
-
-
Sort running applications
Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically.
-
Tracker always first
Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list.
-
Show application expander
Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar.
-
Expand new applications
Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar.
-
Hide application names
Removes the text labels of running applications.
-
Icon size
Adjusts the icon size of running applications.
-
-
Clock
+Preferências do Deskbar
+
Menu
+
Enquanto o primeiro par de itens de menu da Deskbar são fixos, pode-se customizar aqueles abaixo de Desligar....
+
+
Aqui pode-se definir o número de documentos, pastas e aplicativos recentes que são mostrados em menu próprio na Deskbar, ou se deseja vê-los todos.
+O botão Editar menu... abre a pasta ~/config/settings/deskbar. Nela encontram-se os arquivos e pastas que aparecem na Deskbar, por padrão estes são Aplicativos, Demonstrações, Miniaplicativos da Deskbar, e Preferências.
+Pode-se eliminar ou adicionar entradas como vínculos para aplicativos, documentos ou até consultas simplesmente copiando/apagando-os desta pasta.
+
É ainda mais fácil simplesmente arrastar um arquivo, pasta ou consulta salva e soltar onde você quiser na Deskbar.
+
+
Aplicativos
+
+
As seguintes definições não interferem nos aplicativos instalados, mas no comportamento e visual da lista de aplicativos em execução.
+
-
Show seconds
Adds the display of seconds to the clock.
-
Show day of week
Adds the abbreviation of the weekday to the clock.
-
-
+
Ordenar aplicativos em execução
Ordena a lista de programas em execução alfabeticamente.
+
Rastreador sempre primeiro
Mesmo que tenha ordenado alfabeticamente, a entrada do Rastreador sempre permanece em primeiro na lista.
+
Exibir expansor do aplicativo
Proporciona um pequeno dispositivo para exibir/ocultar todas as janelas de um programa diretamente sob sua entrada na Deskbar.
+
Expandir novos aplicativos
Programas carregados recentemente tem suas janelas automaticamente expandidas sob suas entradas na Deskbar.
+
Ocultar nomes de aplicativos
Remove os rótulos de texto de aplicativos em execução.
+
Tamanho do ícone
Ajusta o tamanho do ícone de aplicativos em execução.
+
+
Janela
+
+
A última guia contem as preferências para a janela da Deskbar.
+
+
+
Sempre no topo
A Deskbar permanece sempre sobre todas as outras janelas.
+
Auto-exibir
A Deskbar pula para a frente se o ponteiro do mouse o toca.
+
Auto-ocultar
A Deskbar é reduzida para apenas uns poucos pixels e apenas aparece se o ponteiro do mouse os toca.
Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Hover the mouse over it to display the date in a tooltip. Left-click it to show a calendar. Right-click it to hide/show the clock or launch the Time preferences to set it.
-
Any program can install an icon in the tray to provide an interface to the user. The email system, for instance, shows a different symbol when there's unread mail and offers a context menu to e.g. create or check for new mail. ProcessController is another example that uses its icon in the tray to provide information (CPU/memory usage) and to offer a context menu.
+
Entre outras coisas, a bandeja é a casa do relógio. Pouse o mouse sobre ele para exibir a data em uma legenda. Clique com o botão esquerdo do mouse para exibir um calendário. Clique com o botão direito do mouse para ocultar/exibir o relógio ou carregar as preferências de Hora para definí-las.
+
Qualquer programa pode instalar um ícone na bandeja para prover uma interface ao usuário. O sistema de correio eletrônico, por exemplo, exibe um símbolo diferente quando existe correio não lido e oferece um menu de contexto para, por exemplo, criar ou checar novas mensagens. OControlador de Processos é outro exemplo que usa seu ícone na bandeja para prover informação (uso da memória/CPU) e oferecer um menu de contexto.
You can change to a specific running application by clicking on its entry in the Deskbar and choosing (one of) its windows, from the submenu. By right-clicking you can minimize or close a window or the entire application.
-
If you activated Expanders in the Deskbar settings, you can expand/collapse the list of windows directly under an application's entry.
-
In front of every application's windows is a symbol providing info on its state. A bright symbol means a window is visible, a dark one that it's minimized. Three lines in front of a symbol shows that it's not on the current workspace.
+
Pode-se alternar para um aplicativo em execução específico clicando em sua entrada na Deskbar e escolhendo (uma de) suas janelas a partir do submenu. Clicando com o botão direito do mouse pode-se minimizar ou fechar uma janela ou o aplicativo inteiro.
+
Se ativou Expansores nas definições da Deskbar, pode-se expandir/minimizar a lista de janelas diretamente sob uma entrada de aplicativo.
+
Na frente de cada janela de aplicativo está um símbolo provendo informação sobre o seu estado. Um símbolo brilhante significa que a janela está visível, um escuro significa que está minimizado. Três linhas na frente de um símbolo mostra que ela não está no espaço de trabalho atual.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
LaunchBox
+
Caixa de Lançamento
Deskbar:
Miniaplicativos da área de trabalho
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/LaunchBox
Configurações:
~/config/settings/LaunchBox/*
-
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
Um ou mais miniaplicativos da Caixa de Lançamento pode ser iniciado para organizar atalhos aos seus aplicativos ou documentos favoritos. Decida se cada um é mostrado no todo ou apenas o espaço de trabalho atual. Eles podem também servir para rapidamente abrir um documento em um aplicativo específico. Por exemplo, pode-se arrastar e soltar uma arquivo HTML para um editor de texto numa Caixa de Lançamento para abrí-lo no editor ao invés de seu aplicativo preferido, o navegador.
-
All options are reached from the context menu:
+
Todas as opções são acessadas através do menu de contexto:
-
Add button here
Adds an empty button.
-
Clear button
Empties a button.
-
Remove button
Removes a button.
-
Settings
-- Horizontal layout
-- Icon size
-- Ignore double-click
-- Show window border
-- Auto raise
-- Show on all workspaces
-Aligns the buttons horizontally.
-Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
-Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
-Shows the window border.
-LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
-Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
-
Pad
-- New
-- Clone
-- Close
-Add a new pad.
-Duplicate the current pad.
-Close the current pad.
-
LaunchBox
-- About...
-- Quit
-Shows the About window.
-Quits all LaunchBox pads.
+
Adicionar botão aqui
Adiciona um botão vazio.
+
Limpar botão
Esvazia um botão.
+
Remover botão
Remove um botão.
+
Definir descrição...
Pairando o mouse sobre um ícone exibe uma dica com o nome do arquivo e, no caso de um aplicativo, uma descrição curta caso difira do seu nome (veja o tópico Tipos de Arquivo). Com este item de menu pode-se customizar a descrição nesta dica.
+
Definições
+- Disposição horizontal
+- Tamanho do ícone
+- Ignorar duplo clique
+- Exibir borda da janela
+- Auto levantar
+- Exibir em todos os espaços de trabalho
+Alinha os botões horizontalmente.
+Define o tamanho do ícone entre 16 e 64 pixels.
+Lança o objeto apenas uma vez, mesmo quando clica duas vezes (acidentalmente).
+Exibe a borda da janela.
+A Caixa de Lançamento aparece se o mouse está próximo do canto da tela.
+Exibe a Caixa de Lançamento em todos os espaços de trabalho.
+
Plataforma
+- Nova
+- Clonar
+- Fechar
+Adiciona uma nova plataforma.
+Duplica a plataforma atual.
+Fecha a plataforma atual.
+
Caixa de Lançamento
+- Sair
+Fecha todas as plataformas da Caixa de Lançamento.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
NetworkStatus
+
Estado da Rede
Deskbar:
Miniaplicativos da área de trabalho
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/NetworkStatus
Configurações:
nenhuma
-
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+
O Estado de Rede exibe o estado de suas conexões de rede. Se ainda não estiver executando, carregar o miniaplicativo irá perguntar se deve abrir em modo de janela ou como ícone na Deskbar. No modo de janela, é possível redimensionar o ícone redimensionando a janela e utilizar a alça do Replicante para arrastá-lo para a Área de Trabalho.
+Onde quer que esteja instalado, é operado via menu de contexto acionado por um clique com o botão direito do mouse.
-The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking on such an entry brings up a window showing its IP, broadcast and netmask address.
-Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength. Have a look at the Workshop: Wireless networking for more information on how to set up a connection.
-Lastly, you can Open network preferences... to change your network configuration or Quit the applet.
+A primeira seção contém os nomes de todos os dispositivos de rede e seus estados. Clicar em cada entrada apresenta uma janela exibindo seu IP, broadcast e endereço da máscara de rede.
+Abaixo está uma lista de todas as redes sem fio encontradas pelo primeiro adaptador sem fio e um indicador da força dos seus sinais. Dê uma olhada em Oficina: Redes sem fio para maiores informações sobre como configurar uma conexão.
+Finalmente, pode-se Abrir preferências de rede... alterar sua configuração de rede ou Fechar o miniaplicativo.
-
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
PowerStatus
+
Estado de Energia
Deskbar:
Miniaplicativos da área de trabalho
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/PowerStatus
Configurações:
~/config/settings/PowerStatus settings
-
PowerStatus shows information about the battery level, so it's only useful on mobile computers. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-
Note: PowerStatus requires a working ACPI support.
+
O Estado de Energia exibe informaçãosobre o nível da bateria, portanto é útil apenas em computadores móveis. Se não estiver ainda em execução, carregar o miniaplicativo irá perguntar se deve abrir em modo de janela ou como ícone na Deskbar. No modo de janela é possível redimensonar o ícone redimensionando a janela e utilizando a alça do Replicante para arrastá-lo à Área de Trabalho.
+Onde quer que esteja instalado, é operado através do menu de contexto, pelo clique com o botão direito do mouse.
+
Nota: o Estado de Energia requer um suporte ACPI funcional.
-
The context menu offers these options:
+
O menu de contexto oferece estas opções:
-
Show text label
Shows battery level in percent or remaining time.
-
Show status icon
Shows icon of the applet.
-
Show percent / time
Switch between showing battery level in percent or remaining time (Show text label has to be active).
-
Battery info...
Shows the extended battery info window.
-
About...
Shows the About window.
-
Quit
Quits the PowerStatus applet.
+
Exibir rótulo de texto
Exibe o nível da bateria em percentual ou pelo tempo restante.
+
Exibir ícone de estado
Exibe o ícone do miniaplicativo.
+
Exibir percentagem / tempo
Alterna entre exibir o nível da bateria em percentual ou o tempo restante (Exibir rótulo de texto tem que estar ativo).
+
Informação da bateria...
Exibe a janela de informação ampliada sobre a bateria.
+
Sobre...
Exibe a janela Sobre.
+
Sair
Fecha o miniaplicativo Estado de Energia.
-
When Show text label is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.
+
Quando Exibir rótulo de texto está ativo, o nível da bateria é mostrado entre parêntesis quando em carga.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
ProcessController
+
Controlador de Processos
Deskbar:
Miniaplicativos da área de trabalho
Localização:
/boot/system/apps/ProcessController
Configurações:
nenhuma
-
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
-
Indicators on the left show each CPU's usage, while the bar on the right shows the memory consumption. Remember that the number of indicators depend on the number of processors/cores in the computer.
-
If not yet running, launching ProcessController asks if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you can resize the bar-display by resizing the window and then use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever it's installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in the Deskbar in its context menu.
-
Quit an application
+
A tarefa principal do miniaplicativo Controlador de Processos é exibir a atividade do(s) seu(s) CPU(s) e a quantidade de memória utilizada. Ele permite a monitoração de teams individuais, altera suas prioridades, e os mata se o programa congela. Em ambientes multiprocessados ele permite desabilitar processadores/cores individuais. Quando o Rastreador ou Deskbar trava pode-se reiniciá-los a partir do menu do Controlador de Processos.
+
Indicadores à esquerda exibem o uso de cada CPU, enquanto a barra à direita exibe o consumo de memória. Lembre-se que o número de indicadores depende do número de processadores/cores no computador.
+
Se ainda não estiver executando, carregar o Controlador de Processos pergunta se deve abrir em modo de janela ou como ícone na Deskbar. No modo de janela pode-se redimensionar a barra de exibição redimensionando a janela e então utilizar a alça do Replicante para arrastá-lo para a Área de Trabalho.
+Onde quer que esteja instalado, é operado através do menu de contexto acionado pelo clique com o botão direito do mouse.
+Para remover o miniaplicativo novamente da Deskbar, desmarque Ao vivo na Deskbar no seu menu de contexto.
+
Fechar um aplicativo
-
To quit an application just choose its name from the Quit an application menu. This is a clean way to close app, just like clicking its close button. Be careful not to quit system processes like servers or daemons, however. Your system may stop working reliably.
-
Memory usage
+
Para fechar um aplicativo apenas escolha seu nome do menu Fechar um aplicativo. Este é um modo limpo de fechar aplicativos, como se clicando seu botão de fechar. Seja cuidadoso para não fechar processos de sistema como servidores ou daemons, entretanto. Seu sistema pode certamente parar de funcionar.
+
Uso da memória
-
Monitoring memory usage can be rather inaccurate.
-
This menu allows you to monitor memory usage of different teams in your system. Next to the team's name there are two columns: first with the amount reserved for writable memory, while the second shows all memory including read-only space (shared libraries for example).
-
The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the actually used part of the memory.
+
A monitoração da utilização da memória pode ser muito inexata.
+
Este menu permite monitorar o uso da memória de diferentes teams no seu sistema. Próximo ao n ome do team existem duas colunas: a primeira com a quantidade reservada para memória gravável, enquanto a segunda mostra toda memória incluindo o espaço de apenas leitura (bibliotecas compartilhadas por exemplo).
+
A primeira linha Recursos de sistema & caches... exibe a quantidade total de memória utilizada pelo sistema e todos os aplicativos. A extensão da barra azul é baseada no total de memória física no seu computador. As próximas linhas mostram a memória utilizada em cada processo. Note que a extensão da barra é baseada apenas na parte realmente utilizada da memória.
-
Memory used only by given application (with write access)
-
Memory including read-only space (can be shared with other applications)
+
Memória utilizada apenas por dado aplicativo (com acesso de escrita)
+
Memória incluindo espaco de apenas leitura (pode ser compartilhada com outros aplicativos)
-
Threads and CPU usage
-
This menu allows you to change thread priorities, kill teams or debug them.
-
Changes via the commands in this menu reach deep into the system and can cause data loss and system instability. Keep that mouse hand steady!
+
Processos e utilização da CPU
+
Este menu permite alterar prioridades de processos, matar teams ou depurá-los.
+
Alterações através dos comandos neste menu atingem profundamente o sistema e podem causar perdas de dados e instabilidade do sistema. Mantenha a mão do mouse firme!
-
Kernel code
-
User code
-
Idle thread
+
Código do kernel
+
Código do usuário
+
Processo ocioso
-
At the first level you see team names. By clicking on one, you can kill the whole team. The dark-blue part of the bar is time spent in kernel code, the light-blue part in user code, the green part in the idle thread(s). A bar completely filled with blue means that the team is using all processoring power.
-
The second level shows particular threads of a team. By clicking on one, you can debug or kill it. A bar completely filled with blue means that the thread is pegging one processor/core.
-
The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be it's priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business.
+
No primeiro nível vê-se nomes de teams. Clicando em um, pode-se matar o team inteiro. A parte azul escura da barra é o tempo gasto no código do kernel, a parte azul clara no código do usuário, a parte verde no(s) processo(s) ocioso(s). Uma barra completamente preenchida com azul significa que o team está utilizando todo o poder de processamento.
+
O segundo nível mostra processos particulares de um team. Clicando em um, pode-se depurá-lo ou matá-lo. Uma barra completamente preenchida com azul significa que o processo está prendendo um processador/core.
+
O último nível do menu permite alterar a prioridade do processo. Seja cuidadoso com isso! Como uma regra de ouro, a prioridade de um processo deve ser inversa a sua utilização da CPU. Isto é, quanto mais ele tenta reivindicar tempo de CPU, mais baixa deve ser sua prioridade. Em geral, não bagunce as prioridades de um aplicativo; entre em contato com seu autor, este é seu trabalho.
Você vai encontrar o miniaplicativo Workspaces juntamente com outros nos miniaplicativos da Área de Trabalho no Deskbar. Ele mostra uma versão em miniatura de todos os espaços de trabalho. Existem várias opções disponíveis no menu de contexto da janela do aplicativo, são todas muito auto-explicativas. Mudando a quantidade de espaços de trabalho... abrirá as preferências de Tela onde você pode mudar o número dos espaços de trabalho e a forma como são arranjadas (quantas linhas e colunas).
-
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold SHIFT while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.
+
Uma vez que o miniaplicativo é um Replicante, pode-se redimensionar a janela como desejada e então arrastar e soltá-la na área de trabalho (certifique-se que Exibir replicantes esteja ativado no menu da Deskbar). Segure a tecla SHIFT enquanto redimensiona para manter a taxa de amostragem da sua tela.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Filetypes
+
Tipos de Arquivos
-
Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
-
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
+
Diferentemente do Windows, o Haiku não conta com a extensão de arquivos de 3 letras para o tipo de arquivo (por exemplo, .txt, .jpg, .mp3). Este método é apenas um último recurso. O Haiku usa tipos MIME exatamente como é costume na internet.
+
Ainda que não exista razão para usar extensões de arquivo no Haiku, lembre-se de adicioná-los a arquivos que deseje compartilhar com usuários de outros sistemas operacionais, por exemplo por correio, enviando um arquivo para um servidor ou por troca via dispositivo USB. Caso contrário o sistema deles pode não reconhecer o tipo de arquivo.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
Pode-se mudar o tipo de um arquivo específico, seu ícone e o aplicativo associado. Selecione o arquivo e chame através do clique com o botão direito do mouse, Adicionais | Adicional de tipo de arquivo, a partir do menu de contexto.
The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
Acima temos um arquivo PNG, é uma sequência MIME image/png. Digamos que você definitivamente sabe que não é um PNG mas um GIF. Pode-se mudar isso também entrando com a sequência MIME correta à mão ou com um dos dois botões abaixo da caixa de texto:
-
Select...
shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image.
-
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for.
+
Selecionar...
exibe uma lista hierárquica de tipos de arquivo onde pode navegar para image | GIF Image.
+
O mesmo que...
abre uma caixa de diálogo onde pode-se escolher qualquer arquivo que já tenha o tipo de arquivo que esteja procurando.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
Este menu pop-up exibe uma lista de todos os aplicativos que podem manipular este tipo de arquivo em particular. A partir daqui pode-se escolher qual programa deveria abrir este arquivo específico quando é executado o duplo clique sobre ele. Pode-se, por exemplo, mudar o aplicativo preferido de arquivo HTML do navegador para um editor de texto enquanto se está trabalhando nele. Todos os outros arquivos HTML ainda abrem no navegador, apenas este em particular inicia em seu editor de texto.
-
The Default application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same as... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
+
O Aplicativo padrão é aquele que é definido globalmente para aquele tipo de arquivo. Se não encontrar o programa que deseja associar com este arquivo no menu pop-up, poderá novamente encontrar os botões Selecionar... e O mesmo que... que fazem a mesma coisa descrita em "O Tipo de Arquivo" acima.
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype add-on of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
Se está imaginando o porquê da fonte de ícone na primeira imagem estar vazia: Ícones são normalmente herdados do sistema padrão para aquele tipo de arquivo. Pode-se abrir o Adicional de tipo de arquivo de um arquivo que contenha um ícone e arrastar e soltá-lo dentro da sua fonte de ícone de arquivo. Ou dê um clique duplo na fonte de ícone e crie ou edite seu próprio ícone. Para mais informações sobre ícones e como criar o seu próprio, veja o tópico Icon-O-Mático.
Se chamar o Adicional de tipo de arquivo em um executável (aqui: StyledEdit), obterá um diálogo diferente:
-
On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
-
Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+
No topo verá, ao invés de uma sequência MIME padronizada, a assinatura única da aplicação. Com ela, o sistema encontra o programa onde quer que esteja instalado.
+
Abaixo dele estão vários flags, controlando o comportamento do aplicativo:
-
Single launch
Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.
-
Multiple launch
Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.
-
Exclusive launch
Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.
-
Args only
Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.
-
Background app
The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+
Lançamento único
Apenas uma instância do aplicativo pode ser executado por arquivo executável. Se possuir duas cópias daquele aplicativo, entretanto, eles poderão executar lado a lado.
+
Lançamento múltiplo
Muitas instâncias do aplicativo podem executar simultaneamente.
+
Lançamento exclusivo
Verdadeiramente a apenas uma instância com aquela assintaura de aplicativo é permitido executar por vez.
+
Apenas argumentos
Indica ao aplicativo não responder a mensagens.
+
Aplicação em segundo plano
O aplicativo não irá aparecer no Twitcher ou na lista de aplicativos em execução da Deskbar.
-
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
-
At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
+
Então surge a lista de tipos de arquivos suportados. Pode-se adicionar (e remover) tipos de arquivos se considerar que o aplicativo pode manuseá-los. Como consequencia, o aplicativo aparecerá no menu de aplicativos preferidos ou no menu de contexto Abrir com... do Rastreador quando clicar com o botão direito do mouse em um arquivo daquele tipo.
+
Na base está a informação de versão e direitos autorais. Como a assinatura de aplicativo, eles são preenchidos pelo autor do aplicativo e não deverão ser alterados.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
-
All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
As preferências dos Tipos de Arquivos não lidam com arquivos individuais mas com definições globais de tipos de arquivos. Pode-se mudar ícones padrão e aplicativos preferidos ou adicionar, remover ou alterar atributos de tipos de arquivos inteiros. Pode-se ainda criar seu próprio tipo de arquivo do zero.
+
Todos os tipos de arquivos e suas configurações estão armazenadas em /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Antes de começar a experimentar, seria prudente fazer um backup daquela pasta...
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
Índice
@@ -106,8 +106,8 @@
Enquanto pressiona OPT ou SUPER, as guias mudam de cor quando se sobrepõem; solte a janela para realizar o empilhamento.
-
"Tiling" means gluing windows horizontally or vertically together.
-Again, while holding OPT, the borders that'll fuse together when you drop the window change color when brought near each other.
+
"Encaixar" significa colar janelas horizontalmente ou verticalmente.
+Novamente, enquanto segura OPT, as bordas que serão fundidas quando arrastamos a janela mudam a cor quando próximas uma da outra.
A separação é feita da mesma maneira, pressionando OPT ou SUPER enquanto arrasta uma janela pela sua guia para fora do grupo.
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@
O local que mais aceita Replicantes é a Área de Trabalho: simplesmente arraste e solte a pequena alça sobre ela. A partir desse momento passa a fazer parte da Área de Trabalho e o aplicativo de origem do Replicante não pode ser iniciado por ela.
Um clique com o botão direito do mouse em uma alça Replicante oferece um menu de contexto que mostra a janela Sobre do aplicativo de origem e a opção Remover replicante.
Caso tenha dificuldades com um Replicante na Área de Trabalho e não consiga livrar-se dele, exclua ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Lamentavelmente, isto removerá todos os Replicantes da Área de Trabalho.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
Índice
-
Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
-The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+
Atributos e Consultas são funcionalidades-chave do Haiku. Ao passo que os atributos são úteis por si mesmos, para mostrar informação adicional em um arquivo, para uma consulta, é necessário que eles sejam indexados. Ele os põe dentro de uma tabela de consulta, a qual por sua vez realiza consultas super rápidas.
+O índice é parte do sistema de arquivos e é mantido por todo volume/partição separadamente.
-Indexing commands in Terminal
-
There are several commands to manage the index:
+Comandos de indexação no Terminal
+
Existem vários comandos para gerenciar o índice:
-
lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
-These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
+
lsindex - Mostra os atributos indexados no volume/partição atual.
+Estes são os atributos que são indexados por padrão:
~ ->lsindex
BEOS:APP_SIG
@@ -106,7 +108,7 @@
size
-
mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition.
+
mkindex - Adiciona um atributo ao índice de um volume/partição.
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
@@ -120,11 +122,11 @@
-v, --verbose print information about the index being created
-
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
-Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
Somente novos arquivos com aquele atributo vem automaticamente dentro do índice!
+Arquivos existentes tem que ser adicionados manualmente ao copiá-los e eliminando os originais após isso. Alternativamente pode-se utilizar o comando reindex.
-
reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition.
+
reindex - Põe os atributos de arquivos existentes dentro do recém-criado índice de um volume/partição.
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
-r enter directories recursively
@@ -134,7 +136,7 @@
-
rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition.
+
rmindex - Remove um atributo de um índice de um volume/partição.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
Atalhos e combinações de teclas
-
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
-
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
-
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
+
Por padrão, a tecla de atalho do Haiku, para chamar comandos a partir de menus por exemplo, não é a usual tecla CTRL, mas ALT. isto tem razões históricas, porque o BeOS era ligeiramente inspirado no MacOS. Após acostumar-se, ele realmente tem vantagens como por exemplo ALTC e ALTV integram discretamente no shell bash do Terminal, onde CTRLC fecha o processo em execução.
+
Em todo caso, pode-se alternar para a talvez mais familiaryou can switch to the maybe more familiar tecla CTRL nas preferências do Mapa de teclado. O guia do usuário sempre descreve a configuração padrão com a tecla de comando sendo ALT.
+
Se está em dúvida sobre quais teclas são as teclas OPT ou MENU em seu mapa de teclado/disposição de teclado particular, novamente utiliza as preferências do Mapa de Teclado. Lá pode-se ver que sinal é enviado ao pressionar uma tecla do teclado.
Faz uma captura de tela com atraso zero e carrega a janela de diálogo Captura de Tela.
+
SHIFTPRINT
Obtém uma captura de tela silenciosamente (sem abrir a janela de diálogo), enquanto ainda respeita as últimas definições utilizadas.
+
CTRLPRINT
Também obtém uma captura de tela silenciosamente com as definições salvas, mas ao invés de salvá-la como um arquivo, apenas copia para a área de transferência.
Adicionalmente aos atalhos gerais, eis algumas mais para navegação com o Rastreador:
-
ALT↑
Opens the parent folder.
-
ALT↓ or ENTER
Opens the selected folder.
-
OPT
Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse.
-
MENU
Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC).
-
ALTZ
Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good.
-
ALTSHIFTZ
Redo the action you just reverted with ALTZ.
+
ALT↑
Abre a pasta pai.
+
ALT↓ or ENTER
Abre a pasta selecionada.
+
OPT
Segurando-o enquanto abre uma pasta fechará automaticamente a pasta pai. Isto também funciona ao navegar com o mouse.
+
MENU
Abre o menu do Deskbar (sai com ESC).
+
ALTZ
Desfaz a última ação. O histórico de desfazer é limitado apenas pela memória disponível. Observe, porém, que isto funciona apenas para ações no arquivo em si, atributos alterados e configurações de permissão não podem ser desfeitos com isto. Também, uma vez que um arquivo é removido do Lixo, já era.
Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed.
-
↑ / ↓
Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.
-
CTRLR
Bash history. All the commands you enter
-are stored in the file ~/.bash_history. Press CTRLR and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRLR until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it.
-
CTRLC
Stops the currently running command.
-
CTRLD
Closes the current Terminal session.
+
ALTN
Abre outra sessão do Terminal em uma nova janela.
+
ALTT
Abre outra sessão do Terminal em uma nova guia.
+
ALT1, 2, 3 ...
Alterna para a guia correspondente.
+
ALTTAB
Alterna para a próxima janela do Terminal.
+
SHIFT← / →
Alterna para a guia da esquerda/direita.
+
ALTSHIFT← / →
Move a guia atual para a esquerda/direita.
+
ALT+ / -
Aumenta/Diminui o tamanho da fonte.
+
ALTENTER
Entra/sai do modo de tela cheia.
+
SHIFT↑ / ↓
Rola a saída do Terminal para cima/baixo uma linha.
+
SHIFTPage↑ / Page↓
Rola a saída do Terminal para cima/baixo uma página.
+
TAB
Preenchimento com a tabulação. Após inserir algumas letras, pressione TAB uma vez para auto-completar um nome de arquivo ou caminho. Se existe mais do que uma opção, ele pára onde o nome começa a diferenciar e você tenha acrescentado mais algumas letras para distingui-los mais. Pode-se também pressionar TAB duas vezes para ter todas as opções listadas.
+
↑ / ↓
Move para cima ou para baixo num histórico de todos os comandos previamente inseridos.
+
CTRLR
Histórico do Bash. Todos os comandos que inserir são armazenados no arquivo ~/.bash_history. Pressione CTRLR e comece a inserir um comando e será oferecida a primeira opção do histórico do bash. Mantenha pressionado CTRLR até encontrar o linha de comando certa e pressione ENTER para executá-la.
You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
+
Pode-se adicionar ou remover ítens para/de uma seleção segurando uma tecla modificadora enquanto clica em uma entrada (ou arquivo no caso do Rastreador).
-
SHIFT
This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on.
-
ALT
Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection.
+
SHIFT
Isto irá selecionar tudo entre o primeiro item selecionado e aquele no qual clicou.
+
ALT
Adiciona ou remove o ítem que está clicando a partir da seleção.
-
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
-The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
-Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be configured to filter out all non-matching files. See the topic on type-ahead filtering.
+
Em uma janela do Rastreador, se começar a digitar, o Rastreador rola e seleciona o arquivo que melhor preenche sua pesquisa incremental. Se não houver arquivo iniciando com as letras digitadas, Arquivos que contenham a sequência da pesquisa em algum lugar do seu nome ou outros atributos mostrados são selecionados. Esta pesquisa not diferencia maiúsculas de minúsculas.
+As letras digitadas aparecem na parte inferior à esquerda, onde normalmente o número de itens é listado. Após um segundo ela volta e pode-se iniciar uma nova pesquisa incremental.
+Ao invés de pular para a primeira ocorrência da sequência de pesquisa, o Rastreador pode ser configurado para filtrar todos os arquivos não coincidentes. Veja o tópico em filtragem de auto-preenchimento.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
DataTranslations
+
Traduções de Dados
Deskbar:
Preferências
Localização:
/boot/system/preferences/DataTranslations
-
Configurações:
~/config/settings/* - Every Translator creates its own settings file here after you've changes its defaults.
-~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
Configurações:
~/config/settings/* - Todo Tradutor cria seu próprio arquivo de configuração aqui após a mudança do padrão.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Armazena a posição da caixa de diálogo.
-
Every application has the ability to open and save every file format for which there's a Translator installed. The settings for these Translators are configured in the DataTranslations preferences.
+
Todo aplicativo tem a habilidade de abrir e salvar todo formato de arquivo para o qual existe um Tradutor instalado. As definições para estes Tradutores são configuradas nas preferências de Traduções de Dados.
-
Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an Info... button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.
-The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.
+
Dependendo de suas capacidades, cada Tradutor oferece diferentes definições. Pelo menos obter-se-á um botão Informações... que abre uma janela com os créditos e o caminho da instalação.
+A tabela seguinte dá uma visão geral dos Tradutores padrão e suas opções mais úteis.
-
BMP images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency
-
EXR images
ILM's high dynamic-range (HDR) format
-
GIF images
8bit, lossless compression, transparency
-You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette.
-You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand.
-
JPEG2000 images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
-Here, you normally only care about the output quality.
-
JPEG images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
-Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little.
-
PCX images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format
-
PNG images
32bit, lossless compression, transparency
-
PPM images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format
8bit, compressão sem perda, transparência
+Pode-se reduzir o tamanho do arquivo limitando o número de cores usadas e a paleta.
+Também pode-se gravar imagens com transparência, pelo uso automático do canal alfa ou definindo o valor de RGB que será transparente, manualmente.
+
imagens JPEG2000
24bit, comprimida, sem transparência
+Aqui, o cuidado normalmente é apenas com a qualidade da saída.
+
imagens JPEG
24bit, comprimida, sem transparência
+Além da qualidade da saída pode-se também definir uma suavização que irá amainar a compressão dos objetos mas pode manchar um pouco a imagem.
+
imagens PCX
24bit, não comprimida, sem transparência, formato PC Paintbrush Exchange
+
imagens PNG
32bit, compression sem perda, transparência
+
imagens PPM
24bit, não comprimida, sem transparência, formato Portable PixMap
+
imagens RAW
até 48bit, não comprimida, sem transparência
+
arquivos de texto RTF
Texto formatado
+
imagens SGI
24bit, compressão sem perda opcional, transparência
+
arquivos StyledEdit
Texto formatado
+
imagens TGA
32bit, compressão sem perda opcional, transparência
+
imagens TIFF
24bit, compressão sem perda opcional, camadas, transparência
+
imagens WonderBrush
32bit, camadas, transparência, dados vetor/pixel
-
Screenshots, charts, black&white drawings and other images with few used colors, as well as small pictures are best saved as GIF (up to 256 colors) or PNG (millions of colors). JPEG, for example, introduces compression artefacts without gain in smaller filesize.
+
Capturas de tela, gráficos, desenhos em preto e branco e outras imagens com poucas cores utilizadas, assim como figuras pequenas são melhor armazenadas como GIF (até 256 cores) ou PNG (milhões de cores). JPEG, por exemplo, introduz compressão aos objetos sem ganho nos menores tamanhos de arquivo.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
Índice
@@ -73,154 +73,153 @@
/boot/system/preferences/E-mail
Configurações:
~/config/settings/Mail/*
-
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
-The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
+
O Haiku provê um sistema que recupera correio eletrônico regularmente através de um Serviço de Correio Eletrônico (também conhecido como mail_daemon) e salva cada mensagem como um arquivo de texto simples. Ele analisa a mensagem e preenche seus atributos com todas as informações principais e necessárias, como De, Para, Assunto e seu status de não lido. Agora ele pode ser consultado por você ou por qualquer aplicativo. Este sistema também torna fácil alternar clientes de correio eletrônico como todos os dados e sua configuração permanece a mesma.
+A configuração é feita no painel Preferências de Correio Eletrônico.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
-You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+
Vamos passar pelo processo de definir uma conta de correio eletrônico.
+Comece clicando no botão Adicionar para criar uma conta nova, sem nome. Isto abre um painel onde você preenche as informações de sua conta:
-
First, you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
-
Now you enter your E-mail address, Login name and Password, give an Account name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real name.
-
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses. If that is not the case, clicking Next will open another window to enter this information by hand:
+
Primeiro, defina como receber seu correio, via POP3 ou IMAP.
+
Agora entre com seu Endereço de Correio Eletrônico, Nome de Autenticação e Senha, dê um Nome da Conta sob o qual será conhecido no Haiku e seu Nome verdadeiro.
+
Se sua conta é de um provedor de correio eletrônico de grande porte, o Haiku já conhece todos os detalhes técnicos como endereços IP do servidor. Se não for o caso, clicar Próximo abrirá outra janela para entrar com esta informação manualmente:
-
You first set the Server name, Login type and Connection type for the incoming mail, below that for the outgoing mail. You should find the necessary information on your email provider's website.
-See below for more info about the various settings and additional options.
+
Primeiro defina o Nome do Servidor, Tipo de autenticação e Tipo de conexão para a caixa de entrada, abaixo os dados para a caixa de saída. As informações necessárias são encontradas no sítio web do seu provedor de correio eletrônico.
+Veja abaixo mais informações sobre as várias definições e opções adicionais.
By selecting the name of an account in the left list, you can change some general settings:
+
Selecionando o nome de uma conta na lista à esquerda, pode-se mudar algumas definições gerais:
-
The Account name is the name that's shown for example in the list of accounts in the E-mail preferences. Real name is the name someone sees when she gets mail from you. Return address is the email address that is used when someone replies to your mail. Normally that is the same address you've sent your email from.
-
If you'd like to use an email account to only send or only receive email, you can de/activate that usage by right-clicking the account's name in the leftside list to set the checkmarks accordingly.
+
O Nome da conta é o nome que é mostrado, por exemplo, na lista de contas nas Preferências de Correio Eletrônico. Nome verdadeiro é o nome que alguém vê quando ele recebe uma mensagem sua. Endereço de resposta é o endereço de correio eletrônico que é utilizado quando alguém responde sua mensagem. Normalmente é o mesmo endereço de onde você enviou sua mensagem.
+
Se deseja utilizar uma conta de correio para apenas enviar ou apenas receber mensagens, pode-se a (des)ativar aquela utilização clicando com o botão direito do mouse no nome da conta na lista da esquerda para definir as caixas de seleção de acordo com sua escolha.
Click on Incoming under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
Clique em Entrada sob o nome da sua conta para configurar como as mensagens são recebidas.
-
First is the Mail server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
-
Then you enter your login information, Login name and Password, and if necessary change the Login type from the default Plain text to APOP for authentication.
-
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
-
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify IMAP folders to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
-
Also, you can opt to only Partially download messages larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
-
You can change the Destination of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+
Primeiro é o endereço do Servidor de correio para mensagens recebidas. Se seu provedor necessita que você logue em uma porta específica, adicione-a ao endereço, separada por dois pontos. Por exemplo, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Então entre com seus dados de autenticação, Nome de autenticação e Senha, e se necessário altere o Tipo de autenticação do padrão Texto simples para APOP.
+
Se utilizar POP3 recuperar mensagens destas conta a partir de diferentes computadores, você pode querer ativar a opção para Deixar correio no servidor e somente Remover correio do servidor quando eliminado localmente.
+
Se utilizar IMAP ao invés disso, existe a opção para Remover correio do servidor quando eliminado localmente. Pode-se especificar Pastas IMAP para apenas sincronizar com uma pasta específica e suas subpastas.
+
Igualmente, pode-se optar por somente Baixar parcialmente mensagens maiores que um determinado tamanho. Isto irá apenas obter o cabeçalho e pode-se decidir se deseja baixar o restante da mensagem mais possíveis anexos após ver o assunto e quem enviou. Útil caso tenha uma conexão lenta.
+
Pode-se mudar o Destino da sua Caixa de Entrada (padrão: /boot/home/mail/in/), o que é útil se deseja separar as mensagens de diferentes contas para suas próprias pastas. Contudo, consultas permitem ordenar as coisas muito bem.
Click on Outgoing under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
Clique em Saída abaixo do nome da sua conta para configurar como as mensagens são enviadas.
-
First is the SMTP server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
-
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
-
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Destination of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+
Primeiro é o endereço do Servidor SMTP para mensagens enviada. Assim como o servidor de entrada anterior, pode-se usar uma porta específica se necessário, por exemplo mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
Se precisa autenticar-se, modifique o Tipo de Autenticação para ESMTP e entre com o nome de usuário e senha acima. O outro tipo é usado para provedores que precisam de checagem por correio com POP3 antes de SMTP para identificação.
+
Assim como o correio de entrada, pode-se também mudar o Destino da caixa de saída (padrão: /boot/home/mail/out/).
Notifications for newly arrived email and methods to sort and filter emails are found in E-Mail filters under an account's name. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other and rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.
-Currently there are three Incoming mail filters you can add. After adding a filter, you have to select it to see its options.
+
Notificações para mensagens recém-chegadas e métodos de ordenar e filtrar o correio são encontrados em Filtros de Correio Eletrônico sob um nome de conta. Pode-se adicionar qualquer número de filtros que são aplicados um após o outro e rearranjá-los arrastando e soltando-os para sua nova posição.
+Atualmente existem três Filtros de Correio Recebido que poderá adicionar. Após adicionar um filtro, selecione-o para ver suas opções.
Filtro de Spam (AGMS Bayesiano)
-
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
-You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
-Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
-
Together with the following Rule filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
O filtro de mensagens indesejadas utiliza métodos estatísticos para classificar uma mensagem como indesejada. Ele atribui um valor entre zero e 1 a ela e pode-se decidir o que são os limites para uma mensagem genuína e que será considerado indesejado.
+Pode-se ter aquela classificação de spam adicionada ao início do assunto. Igualmente, o filtro de mensagens indesejadas pode aprender de todo o correio de entrada. Naturalmente, terá que ensiná-lo a ordenar os falso positivos, correios que foram erroneamente marcados como indesejados. Encontrará mais sobre o assunto quando discutirmos o aplicativo Correio.
+
Junto com o Filtro de Regra seguinte, você será capaz de automaticamente ordenar correios indesejados detectados.
Filtro de regra
-
This filter compares the mail header to a search pattern and performs some action according to the rules you set up.
- With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
+
Este filtro compara o cabeçalho da mensagem a um padrão de pesquisa e realiza alguma ação de acordo com as regras definidas.
+Com o primeiro campo de texto especifique qual cabeçalho verificar. Estes estão disponíveis:
Nome
-
the name of the sender
+
o nome do remetente
De
-
the e-mail address of the sender
+
o endereço de correio do remetente
Para
-
your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)
+
seu endereço de correio (diferente para cada conta de correio)
Responder para
-
the e-mail address replies are sent to
+
o endereço de correio para o qual são enviadas respostas
Quando
-
the date and time the mail was received
+
a data e hora que o correio foi recebido
Assunto
-
the subject line
+
a linha de assunto
Com cópia para
-
addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc)
+
endereços de qualquer pessoa que receba uma cópia (Cc)
Conta
-
the name of the e-mail's account
+
o nome da conta de correio
Status
-
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
+
O status atual do correio. Normalmente, este pode ser "Lido", "Respondido", "Enviado", "Encaminhado", "Novo", ou qualquer coisa que você mesmo tenha definido. Contudo, a menos que você mesmo tenha mudado num filtro, ele sempre será "Novo" após o Serviço de Correio ter buscado a mensagem.
Prioridade
-
is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")
+
é definido pelo programa de correio do remetente (por exemplo, "urgente")
Tarefa
-
essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:
+
essencialmente o mesmo que "Assunto", mas sem coisas como Re: ou Fwd:
Grupo de classificação
-
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
+
dependendo em como o filtro de correio indesejado o classificou, isto irá ou ser vazio (se incerto) ou conter a palavra "Genuíno" ou "Spam"
Estimativa de Spam/Genuíno
-
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
esta é uma estimativa numérica que o filtro de correio indesejado atribui ao correio. Eles são exibidos em notação científica, onde 1.065e-12 se traduz em 1.065 dividido por 10 à 12ª potência, o que neste caso significa 0.000000000001065.
-
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
-
With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+
O segundo campo de texto abriga seu padrão de pesquisa. Ele aceita expressões regulares os quais lhe dá grande flexibilidade, enquanto infelizmente complica um pouco as coisas. Leia um pouco sobre o assunto, vale a pena e padrões de pesquisa simples não são tão complicados assim.
+
Com o menu pop-up abaixo dele, atribua uma ação quando o padrão corresponder. Pode-se mover ou eliminar uma mensagem, definir o status para "Lido" ou qualquer outra coisa ou definir a conta de correio que usará para responder.
Notificação de novos correios
-
There are several ways you can choose to be notified of newly arrived email. Under Method you find a number of options that can be combined as well:
+
Existem diversos modos para escolher ser notificado de mensagens recém-chegadas. Em Método encontra-se um número de opções que podem ser combinadas como segue:
-
none
-
No notification
-
Beep
-
Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences for every new email
-
Alert
-
Shows an alert window for every new email
-
Keyboard LEDs
-
Blinks some LEDs like the caps-lock indicator
-
Central alert
-
Shows one alert window for all new mails
-
Central beep
-
Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences once for new mail
-
Log window
-
Shows the log window
+
nenhum
+
Nenhuma notificação
+
Bip
+
Toca o arquivo de som do evento "Novo Correio" definido nas preferências de Sons para todo novo correio
+
Alerta
+
Exibe uma janela de alerta para todo novo correio
+
LEDs do teclado
+
Pisca alguns LEDs como o indicador de trava de maiúscula
+
Alerta central
+
Exibe uma janela de alerta para todos os novos correios
+
Bip central
+
Toca o arquivo de som do evento "Novo Correio" definido nas preferências de Sonsuma vez para novos correios
+
Janela de Relatório
+
Exibe a janela de relatório
Filtros de Saída de Correio
-
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
- It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
+
Neste momento, existe apenas um filtro que trata com o correio recebido: biscoito da sorte.
+ Ele irá anexar um engraçado ou sábio "biscoito da sorte" escolhido aleatoriamente no final de cada correio antes de ser enviado. Pode-se experimentá-lo digitando o comando fortune num Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
Agora que seus servidores de entrada e saída de correio (e talvez alguns filtros também) estão configurados, diga ao Serviço de Correio que faça toda a verificação e busca, como é o seu trabalho.
-
Under Mail checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
-If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only when dial-up is connected and also Schedule outgoing mail when dial-up is disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
-
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While sending, While sending and receiving or Always.
-
Make sure to Start mail services on startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
Em Verificação de correio configure o intervalo no qual o servidor da conta de correio é sondado sobre novas mensagens.
+Se estiver em uma conexão discada, pode desejar fazer com que acesse Apenas quando a conexão discada estiver conectada e também Agendar correio enviado quando a conexão discada estiver conectada para evitar discar automaticamente com regularidade apenas para verificar o correio.
+
O serviço de Correio tem uma janela de status a qual pode ser definida para ser exibida Nunca, Enquanto estiver enviando, Enquanto estiver enviando e recebendo ou Sempre.
+
Certifique-se de Carregar os serviços de correio na inicialização ou não haverá mail_daemon executando para atender seu pedido...
-
Edit mailbox menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
-
From that menu, you can also Create new message..., Check for mail now or edit Preferences....
-
If you hold down SHIFT when invoking the context menu, you'll get additional commands:
+
Editar menu da caixa de correio... irá abrir a pasta /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. Todas as pastas ou consultas (!) ou seus vínculos colocados nesta pasta irão aparecer no menu de contexto do ícone da caixa de correio de Serviços de Correio na bandeja da Deskbar.
+
A partir daquele menu, pode-se também Criar nova mensagem..., Verificar mensagens agora ou editar as Preferências....
+
Se segurar a tecla SHIFT quando chamar o menu de contexto, obterá comandos adicionais:
Checar apenas por correios
-
Offers a submenu to check only one specific account
+
Oferece um submenu para verificar apenas uma conta específica
Enviar correios pendentes
-
Allows you to send pending mails without also checking for new mails
+
Permite enviar correios pendentes sem verificar também novas mensagens
Desligar serviços de correio
-
Quits the whole email infrastructure (mail_daemon)
+
Desliga toda a infraestrutura de correio eletrônico (mail_daemon)
-
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
+
O ícone da caixa de correio por si mesma mostra se existem mensagens não lidas (status "Novo") quando existem envelopes dentro.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
Mapa de Teclado
@@ -68,32 +68,32 @@
Ao pressionar teclas modificadoras como SHIFT, CONTROL ou OPTION, temos uma mudança no teclado exibido conforme a tecla modificadora.
-
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
-
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
Então existem as teclas que são marcadas com um fundo azul. Estas teclas são chamadas Teclas Mortas que podem alterar a tecla que pressionar depois dela. Se clicar com o mouse sobre uma tecla azul, aquelas teclas modificáveis ficam amarelas. Clique novamente e tudo volta ao normal. Exemplos são é, ñ, ó ou ë.
+
Abaixo da representação do teclado estão mais duas opções:
-
Select dead keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
-
Switch shortcut key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
Selecionar teclas mortas
para definir as teclas azuis mencionadas acima.
+
Alterar tecla de atalho...
para utilizar a tecla de atalho em modo Windows/Linux, ou seja CONTROL (normalmente CTRL) ou modo Haiku, ou seja COMMAND (normalmente ALT).
-
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.
-When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
-
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
-
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
-
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
+
As listas à esquerda oferecem os mapas de teclado pré-configurados disponíveis do sistema e, abaixo, se disponível, mapas definidos pelo usuário. Pode-se alterar um mapa de teclado através de arrastar e soltar na representação de teclado: arrastar com o botão esquerdo do mouse pressionado copia uma tecla, arrastar como botão direito do mouse pressionado permuta entre duas teclas.
+Ao concluir pode-se salvar o resultado a partir do menu Arquivo | Salvar.... Seu mapa modificado apenas aparecerá na lista de definidos pelo usuário se armazenado em ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Do contrário, deverá ser carregado manualmente via Arquivo | Abrir....
+
Para melhor combinar o painel do Mapa de Teclado com seu teclado físico, existem muitas diferentes definições disponíveis a partir do menu Disposição.
+
A fonte utilizada na representação do teclado é definida a partir do menu Fonte. Observe que ela pode ou não conter todos os símbolos para um teclado específico.
+
Finalmente, existe um botão Reverter para trazer de volta as definições que estavam ativas quando iniciou as preferências do Mapa de Teclado.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
-
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+
existe outro método para personalizar seu mapa de teclado além do painel de preferências do Mapa de Teclado. Ele envolve editar um arquivo de texto contendo valores hexadecimais, os quais podem parecer assustadores à primeira vista, mas não são realmente impossíveis de compreender.
+
Pode-se desabilitar o mapa de teclado atual com um comando no Terminal:
keymap -d > MyKeymap
-
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
-At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use e.g. SpicyKeys.
-
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
O arquivo de texto gerado pode então ser aberto em um editor de texto. Certifique-se de utilizar uma fonte fixa no editor ou você nunca entenderá o arquivo...
+No início do arquivo, encontrará uma legenda de um teclado estilizado com o valor hexadecimal correspondente para cada tecla. Abaixo estão as atribuições atuais de todos os valores. Pode-se fazer todas as personalizações disponíveis a partir do painel de preferências do Mapa de Teclado, e alguns mais. Se acontecer de ter alguma teclas especiais no seu teclado, será capaz de ativá-las. Isto é, use-as como teclas ordinárias ou como uma tecla de opção ou controle. Não será capaz, por exemplo, de fazer suas teclas multimídia aumentarem/diminuirem o volume ou iniciar algum aplicativo. Para isto pode-se utilizar por exemplo SpicyKeys.
+
Ao terminar, salve o arquivo e faça seu sistema carregar o mapa de teclado modificado com este comando:
keymap -s < MyKeymap
-
If you'd like to import this keymap into the Keymap panel, you have to compile it first to a binary format:
+
Se gostaria de importar este mapa de teclado para o painel do Mapa de Teclado, terá que compilá-lo primeiro para um formato binário:
keymap -c < MyKeymap
-
This will produce a file keymap.out which you can load into Keymap via its Open... menu. By the way, the keymap command is able to load this binary format as well: keymap -l < keymap.out
-
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
+
Isto irá produzir um arquivo keymap.out o qual pode ser carregado para o Mapa de Teclado pelo seu menu Abrir.... A propósito, o comando keymap também é capaz de carregar seu formato binário: keymap -l < keymap.out
+
Este é o arquivo carregado (as teclas mais à direita do teclado estilizado foram cortadas para uma melhor exibição nesta página):
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
Mouse
@@ -61,20 +63,20 @@
-
First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click.
-
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
-
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker....
-
There are three Focus modes that determine how windows react to clicks:
+
Primeiro defina seu tipo de mouse: 1, 2 ou 3 botões. Pode-se simular o segundo (=direito) botão do mouse segurando CTRL enquanto clica com o botão esquerdo. Para o terceiro (=meio) botão do mouse, é CTRLALT e um clique com o botão esquerdo.
+
Pode-se rearranjar os botões do mouse clicando neles e escolhendo seus novos significados a partir do menu pop-up.
+
Com os botões deslizantes à direita, ajuste a velocidade do duplo clique, velocidade do mouse e aceleração. A área de teste abaixo do gráfico do mouse pode ser usada para verificar se a velocidade do duplo clique está a seu gosto: se ao clicar duas vezes sobre uma palavra não a seleciona, está definida muito rápido (ou terá que se acostumar a clicar mais rápido)...
+
Existem três Modos de foco que determinam como as janelas reagem aos cliques:
-
Click to focus and raise
This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top.
-
Click to focus
Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keysCTRLALT.
-
Focus follows mouse
The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the Click to focus mode.
+
Clicar para focar e realçar
Esta é a configuração padrão: clique em uma janela e ela é focada e fica acima das demais.
+
Clicar para focar
Clicar numa janela apenas a coloca no foco, mas não irá realçá-la automaticamente. Para fazer isso, é necessário também clicar na sua guia de título ou borda ou clicar em qualquer lugar enquanto segura as teclas de gerenciamento de janelasCTRLALT.
+
Foco segue o mouse
A janela sob o ponteiro do mouse automaticamente é focada. Para efetivamente realçá-la, deve ser feito como descrito no modo Clicar para focar.
-
Activating Accept first click relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
-
All settings are immediately applied.
+
Ativar Aceitar primeiro clique facilita ter que primeiro colocar o foco em uma janela inativa para que possa acionar ferramentas como um botão ou menu. Corre-se o risco de fechar uma janela de forma não intencional, por exemplo, por tocar acidentalmente no botão de fechar ao visar a guia da janela. Por outro lado, aumenta a velocidade do fluxo de trabalho consideravelmente.
+
Todas as definições são aplicadas imediatamente.
Padrão
redefine tudo para os valores padrão.
-
Reverter
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
+
Reverter
retorna as definições que estavam ativas quando abriu as preferências do Mouse.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Network
+
Rede
Deskbar:
Preferências
Localização:
/boot/system/preferences/Network
@@ -61,11 +63,11 @@
-
At the top, you choose which network adapter to configure.
-
Then you specify if you get your network automatically (via DHCP) or if you're using static addresses. If it's the latter, you'll have to fill out IP Address, Netmask, Gateway and DNS Servers yourself. Otherwise the panel will show the addresses currently set with DHCP.
+
No topo, escolha qual adaptador de rede configurar.
+
Então especifique se obtém a rede automaticamente (via DHCP) ou se utiliza endereços estáticos. Se for este último, preencha o Endereço IP, Máscara de rede, Gateway e Servidores DNS Servers por si mesmo. Do contrário a janela de diálogo mostrará os endereços atualmente definidos com o DHCP.
-
Reverter
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Network preferences.
-
Aplicar
sets the entered configuration.
+
Reverter
retorna as definições que estavam ativas quando iniciou as preferências de Rede.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Screen
+
Tela
Deskbar:
Preferências
Localização:
/boot/system/preferences/Screen
Configurações:
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
-~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode.
-~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Apenas quando executando em modo VESA.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Armazena a posição da janela de diálogo.
-
Cada um de seus workspaces pode ter sua própria resolução, profundidade de cor e taxa de atualização.
+
Cada um de seus espaços de trabalho pode ter a sua própria resolução, profundidade de cor e taxa de atualização.
-
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other menus contain all supported resolution, color depth and refresh rate settings.
-
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
-
To the left, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and it's resolution in dots per inch (dpi). Hovering the mouse pointer over it shows a tooltip with the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
-
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
-
While Haiku's VESA mode performs very well, you may experience some limitations. You may not be able to drive your widescreen display in its native resolution, resulting in a somewhat blurred picture. There may also be limitations with regard to available color depths and refresh rates.
-
To the bottom left you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
+
O menu do topo especifica se suas mudanças são aplicadas apenas no espaço atual ou em todos os espaços. Dependendo de sua placa gráfica, os outros menus contém todas as definições de resoluções suportadas, profundidade de cor e taxa de amostragem.
+
Após clicar em Aplicar, o modo gráfico é alterado e um alerta aparece, perguntando por manter ou cancelar as alterações. Se não responder àquele alerta, o modo gráfico reverte após 12 segundos para a definição anterior. Talvez não possa ver o alerta porque seu monitor não suporta a configuração.
+
À esquerda, vê-se a representação de sua tela com o fabricante e modelo que ela informa e sua resolução em pontos por polegada (dpi). Pairando o ponteiro do mouse sobre ela exibe uma dica com o nome da placa gráfica se for suportada pelo driver. Do contrário exibe "VESA", a rápida solução alternativa que funciona bem em todos os equipamentos.
+
Reverter retorna à definição que estava ativa quando iniciou as preferências da Tela.
+
Apesar do modo VESA do Haiku funcionar muito bem, pode-se experimentar algumas limitações. Pode não ser capaz de ajustar sua tela widescreen em sua resolução nativa, resultando em uma imagem ligeiramente manchada. Também podem existir limitações com respeito a profundidades de cores ou taxas de amostragem disponíveis.
+
No canto inferior esquerdo pode-se definir o número de espaços de trabalho e ordená-los em colunas ou filas e abrir as preferências de Papel de Parede.
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
-With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
A caixa de verificação do topo habilita/desabilita a proteção de tela.
+Com o botão deslizante abaixo dela, controle depois quanto tempo de ociosidade necessário para o protetor de tela disparar.
-
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
-One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
-The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
Os próximos dois botões deslizantes são utilizados apenas após serem ativadas as suas caixas de verificação:
+Um deles determina após quantos minutos a tela é desligada.
+O outro, após quantos minutos é preciso uma senha para desbloquear sua máquina.
-
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again.
+
Clicando em diferentes cantos das duas telas na parte inferior, diga ao sistema quando imediatamente iniciar o protetor de tela ou quando evitar de iniciar ao pousar o mouse no canto indicado. Clique no meio das tela para desabilitar a funcionalidade novamente.
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen savers and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the Test button below the list and add more screen savers with the Add... button beside it. Another way to install new screen savers is by a simple drag&drop into the list. Of course, you can also copy/delete its file in its respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/add-ons/Screen Savers/ or /boot/home/config/add-ons/Screen Savers/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
A segunda guia exibe uma lista de todos os protetores de tela instalados e suas definições individuais. Pode-se testar suas configurações com o botão de Teste abaixo da lista e adicionar mais protetores de tela com o botão Adicionar... ao lado. Outra maneira de instalar novos protetores de tela é simplesmente arrastar e soltar dentro da lista. Naturalmente, pode-se também copiar/eliminar seu arquivo na sua pasta de usuário respectiva, ou seja, /boot/common/add-ons/Screen Savers/ ou /boot/home/config/add-ons/Screen Savers/ (veja o tópico Disposição do Sistema de Arquivos).
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
VirtualMemory
+
Memória Virtual
Deskbar:
Preferências
Localização:
/boot/system/preferences/VirtualMemory
Configurações:
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory
-~/config/settings/VM_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+~/config/settings/VM_data - Armazena a posição da janela da caixa de diálogo.
-
Virtual memory let's the system swap out memory to harddisk, if the RAM can be used more sensibly for other things. So, even if you have lots of RAM, providing virtual memory is never a bad idea.
+
A memória virtual permite ao sistema parmutar memória para o disco rígido, se a RAM puder ser utilizada mais inteligentemente para outras coisas. Assim, ainda que tenha muita RAM, determinar memória virtual nunca é uma má ideia.
-
You can set the size to even more than your physical memory size if needed. With today's huge harddisks, assigning the physical memory size shouldn't be a problem. Still, you can quickly adjust the size if your free space ever runs low. In that case you should also have a look at DiskUsage to find out what's eating up your diskspace.
-
Normally, the swap file's written to your boot partition. If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping memory in and out, you can try to use a separate harddisk for you swap file. Simply another partition on the same harddisk with your system/data won't help.
-Upgrading your RAM is of course the most effective way to go...
+
Pode-se definir o tamanho para algo maior do que sua memória física se necessário. Com os grandes discos dos dias de hoje, atribuir o tamanho da memória física não deveria ser um problema. Todavia, pode-se rapidamente ajustar o tamanho se seu espaço livre ainda for pouco. Neste caso deve-se também dar uma olhada no Uso do Disco para encontrar o que está devorando seu espaço em disco.
+
Normalmente, o arquivo de troca é gravado na sua partição de inicialização. Se frequentemente executar no disco destrói diretamente o sistema de memória virtual transferindo memória para dentro e para fora, pode-se tentar utilizar um disco rígido separado para seu arquivo de troca. Simplesmente outra partição no mesmo disco rígido do seu sistema/dados não irá ajudar.
+Aumentar a sua RAM é naturalmente o mais efetivo caminho a seguir...
Padrão
redefine tudo para os valores padrão.
-
Reverter
brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences.
+
Reverter
traz de volta as definições que estavam ativas quando iniciou as preferências da Memória Virtual.
A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
-Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
+
Uma consulta é uma pesquisa de arquivos baseada em atributos e pode ser realizada dentro do Rastreador ou no Terminal. As consultas são salvas em /boot/home/queries/ e por padrão após sete dias são eliminadas. Note que estas não listas estáticas resultantes de sua pesquisa, mas são as fórmulas de consulta que ativam uma nova pesquisa toda vez que abertas.
+Ainda melhor, não é preciso duplo clique para refazer uma consulta. Pode-se aprofundar uma consulta salva assim como qualquer pasta com o clique do botão direito do mouse sobre ela e navegar através dos submenus.
You start a query by invoking the Find... menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALTF. You're presented with the Find window:
Inicia-se uma consulta acionando o menu Encontrar... também a partir do menu da Deskbar ou de qualquer janela do Rastreador ou da Área de Trabalho (que na realidade é uma janela em tela cheia do Rastreador). As teclas de atalho são ALTF. Será mostrada a janela Encontrar:
-
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
-
Narrow down your search from All files and folders to specific file types.
-
Define the search method:
-
by Name - a basic search by file or folder name
-
by Attribute - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes
-
by Formula - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
-
Select which drives to search on.
-
Enter the search term.
-
The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
-
Uncheck the Temporary checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
-
Check if your query is supposed to Include trash.
-
Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
-
You can drag&drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
+
Seleciona consultas recentes ou salvas ou salva os parâmetros da pesquisa atual como Modelo de Consulta.
+
Afina sua pesquisa a partir de Todos os arquivos e pastas para tipos de arquivo específicos.
+
Define o método de pesquisa:
+
por Nome - uma pesquisa básica por nome de arquivo ou pasta
+
por Atributo - uma pesquisa avançada, especificando termos de pesquisa para um ou mais atributos
+
por Fórmula - uma pesquisa ainda mais avançada, pode-se fazer uma sintonia fina de um termo de pesquisa complexo
+
Seleciona que dispositivos pesquisar.
+
Insere o termo de pesquisa.
+
O expansor oculta/exibe as opções adicionais.
+
Desmarque a caixa de verificação Temporário se não quiser que esta consulta se auto-destrua após 7 dias.
+
Marque se sua pesquisa pretende Incluir a lixeira.
+
Opcionalmente, insira um nome para esta pesquisa se deseja salvá-la.
+
Pode-se arrastar e soltar o ícone em qualquer lugar para salvar uma consulta. Fazer isso com o botão direito do mouse, oferece a opção de salvar como modelo.
If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at by Name, enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
Se simplesmente deseja encontrar todos os arquivos e pastas em seus discos montados que atendem a certo padrão, simplesmente deixe o método de pesquisa em por Nome, insira o termo de pesquisa dentro da caixa de texto e pressione ENTER.
Pode-se criar consultas mais avançadas pela pesquisa dentro dos atributos de tipos específicos de arquivo. Para que funcione, estes atributos tem que estar indexados.
-
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by Attribute.
-
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
-
Let's do an email query as an example:
+
Comece por definir o tipo de arquivo a partir de Todos os arquivos e pastas para, por exemplo, Texto | Correio eletrônico e altere o método de pesquisa para por Atributo.
+
Isto adiciona um menu pop-up à esquerda da caixa de texto e os botões Adicionar e Remover abaixo dele. A partir do menu escolha qual atributo pesquisar. Com Adicionar e Remover pode-se consultar atributos adicionais ou removê-los novamente. Estes atributos podem ser logicamente vinculados com E/OU.
+
Façamos uma consulta de correio eletrônico como um exemplo:
-
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Botters has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "vibraphone" or "skepticality".
-As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
-A good way to cut down the number of search results.
+
Esta é sua janela Encontrar quando está procurando por todas as mensagens que Clara Botters enviou a você nos últimos dois meses com o assunto "vibraphone" ou "skepticality".
+Como pode ver, procurar através de atributos baseados em tempo suporta algumas frases úteis: além de "últimos 2 meses", poderia também utilizar "hoje", "ontem", "Segunda-feira" ou "última Segunda-feira" (o que seria a Segunda-feira da semana passada), ou "últimos 2 minutos/horas/dias/semanas".
+Uma boa maneira de reduzir o número de resultados de pesquisa.
Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
-
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by Formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
Digitar em uma consulta por fórmula à mão é assustador e realmente muito pouco prático. Mas tem seus usos.
+
Tome a consulta por atributo das mensagens de Clara sobre vibrafones acima. Se possui todos os atributos e seus termos de busca definidos, tente alterar para o modo por Fórmula mode e seja oprimido por esta sequência de consulta em uma linha:
-
Once more as text, edited for readability:
+
Mais uma vez como texto, editado para maior legibilidade:
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
-
You can use this method to construct a query in Attribute mode and then switch to Formula mode, to comfortably generate a search string to use for a query in Terminal or a script.
-
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
+
Poderia copiar e colar a sequência dentro de uma mensagem de correio, forum ou IRC para outros utilizarem ou depurarem.
+
Pode-se utilizar este método para construir uma consulta no modo Atributo e então alternar para o modo Fórmula, para confortavelmente gerar uma sequência de pesquisa para uso numa consulta no Terminal ou num script.
+
Pode-se realizar uma sintonia fina de sua consulta ao inserir parêntesis onde necessário, fazer partes diferenciarem maiúsculas de minúsculas ou negar combinações lógicas por mudança. Por exemplo, "==" para "!=" para um NÃO E. Tudo o que precisa é um entendimento básico de expressões regulares e talvez alguma base de scripting.
Após iniciar uma pesquisa, a janela Encontrar será substituída por uma janela de resultado. Aqui está um exemplo que consultou por "servidor":
-
Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+
Além do fundo cinzaa janela de resultado funciona exatamente como qualquer outra janela do Rastreador. Algumas coisas são dignas de nota:
-
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
-
With File | Edit query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
-
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
Pode-se abrir a localização de um arquivo ou pasta pelo clique duplo no seu atributo de caminho.
+
Com Arquivo | Editar consulta ou ALTG pode-se voltar para a janela Encontrar para refinar a consulta.
+
Uma consulta é viva, ou seja, se um arquivo que atende a seus critérios de pesquisa aparece ou desaparece de seu sistema, esta mudança é refletida nos seus resultados em tempo real.
-
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy layout.
-
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste layout.
+
Pode-se atribuir uma disposição de atributo sensível para resultados de consultas de um tipo de arquivo específico. Abra uma pasta contendo arquivos do tipo de arquivo para o qualque gostaria de criar um modelo e organize os atributos como gostaria de ter os resultados da consulta apresentados. Copie esta disposição com Atributos | Copiar disposição.
+
Abra /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, crie uma nova pasta chamada grupo/tipo de arquivo, substituindo a barra com um sublinhado, por exemplo "audio_x-mp3". Abra a nova pasta e cole nela a disposição previamente copiada com Atributos | Colar disposição.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
-By using the Save query as template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
-
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
Ao executar duplo clique numa consulta salva, a pesquisa de arquivo é iniciada e a janela de resultado abre imediatamente. Contudo, você pode não querer pesquisar com estes parâmetros de pesquisa exatos, mas utilizá-lo como ponto de partida para apenas ajustar levemente a fórmula.
+Ao utilizar o item de menu Salvar consulta como modelo (veja (1) na captura de tela no topo) ou arrastar e soltar o ícone (10) em qualquer lugar com o botão direito do mouse, pode-se criar o referido modelo. Um duplo clique nele não irá abrir uma janela de resultado, mas a janela de diálogo Encontrar, dando a oportunidade para rapidamente alterar as sequências de pesquisa ou adicionar/remover atributos.
+
Onde quer que escolha salvar modelos de consulta, eles serão listados no menu da janela de diálogo Encontrar de consultas recentes.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Tracker Add-Ons
+
Adicionais do Rastreador
-
Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under Add-Ons from the context menu or the File menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
-
Tracker Add-Ons, or links to applications that can act as add-ons, can be installed in three different locations (see topic Filesystem layout):
+
Aplicativos podem instalar adicionais assim podem ser chamados facilmente numa seleção de arquivos a partir do Rastreador. Apenas os adicionais que podem manusear um tipo de arquivo específico são apresentados sob Adicionais a partir do menu de contexto ou do menu Arquivo de uma janela do Rastreador. Alguns adicionais não necessariamente precisam de um arquivo para funcionar e são, assim, sempre presentes.
+
Adicionais do Rastreador, ou vínculos para aplicativos que podem agir como adicionais, podem ser instalados em três diferentes locais (veja o tópico Disposição do Sistema de Arquivos):
-
/boot/system/add-ons/Tracker/
for system provided add-ons.
-
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons available to every user.
-
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons only available to yourself.
+
/boot/system/add-ons/Tracker/
para adicionais providos pelo sistema.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
para adicionais disponíveis para todos os usuários.
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
para adicionais disponíveis apenas para você mesmo.
-
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-O opens with ALTOPTO.
-Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
+
O nome de arquivo de um adicional pode ser sufixado com um travessão e uma letra maiúscula e é então disponbilizado através de tecla de atalho. Por exemplo, Abrir Pasta Alvo-O abre com ALTOPTO.
+Naturalmente, deve-se ter cuidado com possíveis conflitos de atalhos quando decidir por um atalho. Não se pode ter o mesmo para diferentes adicionais.
Estes Adicionais do Rastreador vêm com toda instalação Haiku:
-
Background-B
-
Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background.
-
DiskUsage-I
-
Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis.
-
FileType-F
-
Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched.
-
Open Target Folder-O
-
Can only be used on a linked file and opens the folder that file lives in.
-
TextSearch-G
-
Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders).
-
ZipOMatic-Z
-
A selection of files will be added to a zip archive, invoked without a selection opens a panel to create an archive via drag&drop.
+
Fundo-B
+
Abre as preferências de Fundo para alterar a cor ou imagem da Área de Trabalho ou de qualquer pasta. Chamado num arquivo de imagem, a janela de diálogo do Fundo é carregada com aquela imagem já carregada como um fundo potencial.
+
Uso do Disco-I
+
Inicia o aplicativo Uso do Disco com a pasta atual como base.
+
Tipo de Arquivo-F
+
Chamado sobre um arquivo, abre sua janela de diálogo Tipo de Arquivo específica, do contrário as preferências gerais do Tipos de Arquivos são carregadas.
+
Abrir Pasta Alvo-O
+
Pode apenas ser utilizado em um arquivo vinculado e abrir a pasta onde fica aquele arquivo.
+
Pesquisa de Texto-G
+
Inicia o aplicativo Pesqusia de Texto para procurar uma sequência na pasta selecionada (e suas subpastas).
+
ZipOMático-Z
+
Uma seleção de arquivos será adicionada a um arquivo compactado zip, chamado sem uma seleção abre uma janela de diálogo para criar um arquivo compactado via arrastar e soltar.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Twitcher
+
Alternador
-
The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
O Alternador é um seletor de tarefas para saltar entre aplicativos em execução e suas janelas.
-
Just tap CTRLTAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRLTAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRLTAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
-
You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
-
It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRLTAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
-
The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+
Apenas pressione CTRLTAB para alternar entre o atual e o último aplicativo/janela. Pressionando CTRLTAB muito rapidamente irá alternar entre todos os aplicativos. Ou pressione e segure CTRLTAB para ir através de todos os aplicativos em execução batendo repetidamente TAB ou ←/→. Se precisa obter uma janela específica de um programa, mova para seu ícone como descrito e então vá pela sua janela aberta comas teclas ↑/↓.
+
Circule através das janelas visíveis de todos os aplicativos no atual espaço de trabalho com CTRL~ (o qual, dependendo do mapa de teclado que esteja usando, é a tecla abaixo de ESC).
+
É também possível chamar o Twitcher com CTRLTAB e então utilizar o mouse para escolher o aplicativo/janela para o qual pular quando soltar a tecla CTRL.
+
O Twitcher também oferece teclas de atalho um pouco mais avançadas:
-
ESC
Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window.
-
Q
Quits the selected application.
-
H
Hides all windows of the selected application.
+
ESC
Aborta a alternação e retorna para a janela ativa anterior.
+
Q
Encerra o aplicativo selecionado.
+
H
Oculta todas as janelas do aplicativo selecionado.
@@ -73,7 +75,7 @@
Twitcher
- Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries
+ Oficina: Tipos de arquivos, Atributos, Indexação e Consultas
@@ -40,12 +42,14 @@
Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries
+
Oficina: Tipos de arquivos, Atributos, Indexação e Consultas
This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I wanted to use a Bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but Haiku doesn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at the moment, so I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
-To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I planned to use a bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but since Haiku didn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at that time, I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+With WebPositive, Haiku now has a browser using bookmark files again, so you could as well use a bookmark file instead of an image as basic filetype for our database files.
+In any case, to these files we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
-
Select...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
-
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
+
Selecionar...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
O mesmo que...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
Getting the networking to run is essential in today's need for permanent internet connection. As keeping up to date with all the different and ever changing hardware and drivers is quite impossible for a small project, Haiku relies on a FreeBSD compatibility layer for its networking drivers.
-This ensures a massive amount of supported hardware, though probably not 100% of what's out there. See this list online for a list of supported models or check FreeBSD 9's release hardware notes.
Currently only PCI, PCI-X, PCI-Express, Mini PCI, and Mini PCI-Express devices are expected to work.
PCMCIA, CardBus, ExpressCard, USB and ISA devices still need more work to become functional.
A tradução desta página ainda não está completa. Até lá, partes incompletas mostrarão o original em inglês.
-
Workspaces
+
Espaços de Trabalho
-
Workspaces são áreas de trabalho virtuais completas, cada qual com sua própria resolução, profundidade de cor e papel de parede. Até 32 desses workspaces podem ser definidos a partir das preferências em Screen.
+
Espaços de Trabalho são áreas de trabalho virtuais completas, cada qual com sua própria resolução, profundidade de cor e papel de parede. Até 32 desses espaços de trabalho podem ser definidos a partir das preferências em Tela.
You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALTFx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
-Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
-
Another very convenient way is to use CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
-
You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
Pode-se anlternar entre espaços de trabalho clicando no Miniaplicativo Espaços de Trabalho (o qual é visto na imagem acima) ou utilizando as teclas de atalho ALTFx, onde "x" é o número do espaço de trabalho. É uma boa ideia organizar seus espaços de trabalho em fileiras de quatro para imitar a disposição das teclas de função Fx no teclado.
+Também, clicando num aplicativo ou numa de suas janelas na Deskbar irá remeter para o espaço de trabalho onde ele se encontra.
+
Outro modo bastante conveniente é utilizar CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ para navegar espacialmente nas fileiras/colunas dos espeços de trabalho disponíveis. Se adicionalmente pressionar SHIFT, a janela ativa irá mover-se para o novo espaço de trabalho.
+
Pode-se retornar e avançar entre dois espaços de trabalho com ALT` (a tecla real depende do mapa de teclado que esteja usando - é a tecla abaixo de ESC). Novamente, pressionar SHIFT irá tornar a janela ativa.
Rozchodenie bezdrôtovej siete je nevyhnutné v dnešnej dobe neustáleho sieťového pripojenia. Pretože udržiavanie aktuálnej podpory rozličného a neustále sa meniaceho hardvéru a ovládačov je pre malý projekt celkom nemožné, Haiku sa pri implementácii sieťových ovládačov spolieha na vrstvu kompatibility FreeBSD.
-Tá nám zabezpečuje obrovské množstvo podporovaného hardvéru, hoci zrejme nie 100% všetkých, ktoré existujú. Pozrite si online zoznam podporovaných modelov alebo sa pozrite do Poznámok o hardvéri FreeBSD 9.
Momentálne sa očakáva, že budú fungovať iba zariadenia PCI, PCI-X, PCI-Express, Mini PCI a Mini PCI-Express.
Zariadenia PCMCIA, CardBus, ExpressCard, USB a ISA ešte vyžadujú ďalšiu prácu, než budú funkčné.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
+
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
+When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
+After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
+
+
Attempt to reproduce your issue on the current revision of Haiku. Pre-built images for testing purposes are available.
+
Include basic information such as how you are testing Haiku (on real hardware, on VMWare, on QEMU, etc.).
+
Mention which revision from SVN you are running. You can find this information in About Haiku... from the Deskbar menu. Also mention what kind of Haiku build you are testing (gcc2, gcc4, gcc2hybrid, gcc4hybrid). The downloadable images are named accordingly, for a self-built image you should know how you built it.
+
Describe the problem you are experiencing. Try to be as accurate as you can: describe the actual behavior, and the behavior you expected.
+
Describe what steps you need to perform in order to expose the bug. This will help developers reproduce the bug.
+
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to take a screenshot by pressing the PRINT key.
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. This will open a Terminal window with gdb (the GNU debugger) running in it. Entering bt, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy in its entirety (including the part before you entered the bt command) and attach it to the ticket.
When vital servers like the app server, the registrar or the input server crash, you won't see the usual crash alert. Instead the whole screen will be cleared white and a gdb session will be started, its output appearing directly on screen. Likely you will still be able to move the mouse, which will overwrite the white and gdb output on screen. Applications still running (like ProcessController or the clock in the Deskbar) might also draw over the debugger output on screen.
+Besides everything being more ugly and inconvenient, basically the same applies as for application bugs. Most importantly procure a back trace (bt command). You may need to take a picture of the screen with a digital camera, since you won't be able to copy the text anywhere.
Kernel bugs are usual the ones with the most severe effects while at the same time being the hardest to debug. There are different kinds of symptoms, which most likely point to a kernel or driver issue:
+
+
The system enters kernel debugging land (KDL) on its own volition. The upper part of the screen is cleared white and several lines of text are printed on it. The second line says "Welcome to Kernel Debugging Land...", the one above it states the immediate reason for entering KDL.
+
The system reboots spontaneously.
+
The system freezes completely. You can't move the mouse and no application draws anything anymore. An important test in that situation is, whether you still can enter KDL via the shortcut ALTSysReqD (SysReq being PRINT on most keyboards). Wait at least a minute to see, if anything happens.
+
The system doesn't boot up correctly. It may reboot spontaneously or stop at some point (e.g. at some icon of the boot screen). In the latter case also try ALTSysReqD.
+
The whole system or some piece of hardware doesn't behave correctly. For example, it could be very slow, errors occur, or something doesn't work at all. If some hardware doesn't work at all, the first obvious check is whether Haiku supports it at all at the moment (e.g. ask on a mailing list or a forum).
+
+
Note that while only the last point seems to indicate hardware relation, all the other symptoms could be caused by a bug in a hardware driver as well. If you have a suspicion what piece of hardware or corresponding driver might have to do with the problem, check whether removing/disabling the hardware or the driver makes a difference. For example, if you suspect Wifi you may find that your BIOS has an option to disable it. Or if not, you could remove the responsible Wifi driver from your Haiku installation (in /boot/system/add-ons/kernel/drivers/bin).
If the system hasn't entered KDL by itself, you can do that intentionally by invoking the keyboard shortcut ALTSysReqD.
+Note that in KDL your keyboard may not work. PS/2 keyboards always do, USB keyboards connected via UHCI controllers do only, if one has entered KDL via the keyboard shortcut at least once. USB OHCI is not supported at the moment.
+
KDL itself is a kind of a shell. One can execute commands that print information about the system. The following commands might be of interest:
+
+
bt (aka sc)
Prints a back trace. If the system entered KDL on its on volition, always enter that one.
+
ints
Shows the handled and unhandled hardware interrupts.
+
co (aka continue)
Leaves the kernel debugger and continues normal operation of the system, if that is possible.
+
reboot
Reboots the system immediately. You will lose all unsaved data and even those that have been saved, but have not yet been written back to disk.
The KDL output is written to the serial port (if you have one, a respective cable, and a second computer to connect with, you can capture the output there via a terminal program) and to the syslog. If you can't leave KDL it won't be written to the syslog file, though. There's a boot loader debug option that allows you to capture it nonetheless (see below).
+
You can generate QR codes from KDL output that can then be converted to text using smartphones or similar devices. See the blog post QR Encode your KDL Output on how to get data out of KDL using that feature.
This is the preferred method for gaining information from a non-booting system.
+The syslog (short for system log) contains valuable information about what has happened in your system, including the output of KDL sessions. It's usually a good idea to attach it to the kernel related Trac ticket. The syslog is written to the file /boot/common/var/log/syslog. Since writing to a file requires a working system, the most recent output might not have made it to the syslog when a kernel problem occurs (particularly on spontaneous reboots or uncontinuable KDL sessions).
+
The option Enable debug syslog in the boot loader's Debug menu makes the syslog somewhat persistent in memory. By default the option is enabled. "Somewhat persistent" means that it survives a reset and will still be accessible when you enter the boot loader menu directly afterwards. Booting an operating system (Haiku definitely, others likely) destroys the information, though. So you have to enter the boot loader menu by holding down SHIFT while booting.
+In the boot loader's Debug menu you should now find the entries Display syslog from previous session and Save syslog from previous session. The former displays the syslog on screen, the latter allows you to save it as a file to disk. Note that at the moment only FAT32 volumes are supported for saving the file. If you want to use a USB stick, but have plugged it in too late so that it isn't recognized yet, you can reset the machine and re-enter the boot loader menu. But again: Don't accidentally boot any operating system or the data will be lost.
The on-screen debug output is useful only for debugging very specific issues and is known to have (timing) issues. Don't use it, if you don't have to.
+This is only relevant when Haiku fails to boot on your machine and the Debug syslog option doesn't work for some reason. Before the Haiku boot logo appears, hold SHIFT to enter the boot loader menu. Select Select safe mode options. Near the bottom, [ ] Enable on screen debug output will be listed. (Note: The other options could be enabled in an attempt to boot Haiku. If Haiku will boot only when one or more options are activated, be sure to mention which ones.)
+Finally select Return to main menu and then Continue booting.
+One or more pages of text will display on the screen, only the last few lines need to be included on your ticket. There's more information on the Boot Loader.
When dealing with a hardware/driver related bug, you should attach the following information as text files:
+
+
+
- listdev
A detailed listing of your hardware, including vendor and pci id's, similar to Linux' lshw and lspci.
+
- listusb -v
Assuming its a USB related issue, similar to lsusb.
+
- open /var/log/syslog
The primary system log used by Haiku, akin to on screen debugging during boot. With the open command you can crop down the relevant part of the syslog in a text editor.
+
- listimage | grep drivers/
Lists all used drivers.
+
- ints
Only available within Kernel Debugging Land (see above). Shows interrupt usage. There shouldn't be too many that are shared by different devices.
+
- On screen debug output (a safe mode boot time option).
+
+
+
The first four commands are entered into Terminal. Add a > output.txt after a command, and it's piped into a text file called "output.txt" that you can attach to your bug report or email.
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
+non-descriptive comments.
+
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
+as 'fixed'.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. This will open a Terminal window with gdb (the GNU debugger) running in it. Entering bt, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy in its entirety (including the part before you entered the bt command) and attach it to the ticket.
When vital servers like the app server, the registrar or the input server crash, you won't see the usual crash alert. Instead the whole screen will be cleared white and a gdb session will be started, its output appearing directly on screen. Likely you will still be able to move the mouse, which will overwrite the white and gdb output on screen. Applications still running (like ProcessController or the clock in the Deskbar) might also draw over the debugger output on screen.
Besides everything being more ugly and inconvenient, basically the same applies as for application bugs. Most importantly procure a back trace (bt command). You may need to take a picture of the screen with a digital camera, since you won't be able to copy the text anywhere.
Kernel bugs are usual the ones with the most severe effects while at the same time being the hardest to debug. There are different kinds of symptoms, which most likely point to a kernel or driver issue:
The system enters kernel debugging land (KDL) on its own volition. The upper part of the screen is cleared white and several lines of text are printed on it. The second line says "Welcome to Kernel Debugging Land...", the one above it states the immediate reason for entering KDL.
If the system hasn't entered KDL by itself, you can do that intentionally by invoking the keyboard shortcut ALTSysReqD.
Note that in KDL your keyboard may not work. PS/2 keyboards always do, USB keyboards connected via UHCI controllers do only, if one has entered KDL via the keyboard shortcut at least once. USB OHCI is not supported at the moment.
KDL itself is a kind of a shell. One can execute commands that print information about the system. The following commands might be of interest:
This is the preferred method for gaining information from a non-booting system.
The syslog (short for system log) contains valuable information about what has happened in your system, including the output of KDL sessions. It's usually a good idea to attach it to the kernel related Trac ticket. The syslog is written to the file /boot/common/var/log/syslog. Since writing to a file requires a working system, the most recent output might not have made it to the syslog when a kernel problem occurs (particularly on spontaneous reboots or uncontinuable KDL sessions).
The option Enable debug syslog in the boot loader's Debug menu makes the syslog somewhat persistent in memory. By default the option is enabled. "Somewhat persistent" means that it survives a reset and will still be accessible when you enter the boot loader menu directly afterwards. Booting an operating system (Haiku definitely, others likely) destroys the information, though. So you have to enter the boot loader menu by holding down SHIFT while booting.
In the boot loader's Debug menu you should now find the entries Display syslog from previous session and Save syslog from previous session. The former displays the syslog on screen, the latter allows you to save it as a file to disk. Note that at the moment only FAT32 volumes are supported for saving the file. If you want to use a USB stick, but have plugged it in too late so that it isn't recognized yet, you can reset the machine and re-enter the boot loader menu. But again: Don't accidentally boot any operating system or the data will be lost.
The on-screen debug output is useful only for debugging very specific issues and is known to have (timing) issues. Don't use it, if you don't have to.
This is only relevant when Haiku fails to boot on your machine and the Debug syslog option doesn't work for some reason. Before the Haiku boot logo appears, hold SHIFT to enter the boot loader menu. Select Select safe mode options. Near the bottom, [ ] Enable on screen debug output will be listed. (Note: The other options could be enabled in an attempt to boot Haiku. If Haiku will boot only when one or more options are activated, be sure to mention which ones.)
Finally select Return to main menu and then Continue booting.
One or more pages of text will display on the screen, only the last few lines need to be included on your ticket. There's more information on the Boot Loader.
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
non-descriptive comments.
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
diff --git a/docs/welcome/pt_PT/bugreports.html b/docs/welcome/pt_PT/bugreports.html
index 5a059bfa6ec..679f56fa0af 100644
--- a/docs/welcome/pt_PT/bugreports.html
+++ b/docs/welcome/pt_PT/bugreports.html
@@ -41,6 +41,7 @@
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our fourth public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
+
Visit our project's website Haiku-os.org for the latest news and announcements.
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
+
We discourage using alpha versions as a production system. Your data could very well be altered, mangled or downright destroyed.
+
+
One of the main reasons for releasing an alpha version is to attract more people to test the system and discover bugs or provide suggestions for future enhancements. Please file bugs and enhancements in our bug tracker after using its search function to avoid duplicates.
The first release(s) of Haiku will be very much like the BeOS R5, the operating system it is reimplementing. If you never experienced it, have a look at these links:
Because of our binary and source compatibility, many BeOS applications run on Haiku (you may have to install the optional package "beoscompatibility" for some programs, see below). After downloading a package, simply unzip it (double clicking opens Expander) to /boot/apps/ and start the application from there.
HaikuPorts - maintains patches for ported software
+
OsDrawer - hosts native BeOS and Haiku open source software projects
+
+
+
There are also so-called Optional Packages, which are used by Haiku's build system. It is not intended for end users to manually extract and install them. Instead, a utility script is provided, installoptionalpackage. This script is meant to bridge the gap while Haiku's package management is still under construction. It will allow you to install most of the available Optional Packages.
+You'll have to run a command in Terminal: installoptionalpackage -h explains its usage.
Haiku supports wireless networks that are WPA/WPA2 or WEP encrypted and of course open, unencrypted connections. Due to several different licensing policies of different hardware vendors, a manual installation process for the firmware may be required. You'll find more information on supported hardware, firmware installation and how to join a wireless network in the Haiku User Guide's Workshop: Wireless networking.
Since Haiku is a reimplementation, the API is still the same as for BeOS R5 (with some additions). Therefore the documentation in the Be Book is still a valid resource. Thanks to ACCESS, who owns the rights to former Be Inc. property, we are allowed to provide a copy of the Be Book.
+Deviations from the BeOS API and Haiku specific additions are collected in the Haiku Book.
+
+
There are some resources that should help you getting started:
Get in contact with other developers and users and join the discussions on IRC (#haiku on webchat), in our forums or the mailing lists. When many different people come together, rules have to established to keep communication effective. Please respect our Mailing List Etiquette.
Alle schwerwiegenden Fehler sind, soweit bekannt, beseitigt. Da es sich aber trotz alledem um eine Alpha-Version handelt, muss man davon ausgehen, dass es noch Fehler gibt, die noch nicht entdeckt wurden.
-
Diese Alpha-Version sollte nicht für wirklich kritische Aufgabe verwendet werden! Obwohl es unwahrscheinlich ist, kann Datenverlust nicht ausgeschlossen werden!
+
Wir haben uns sehr bemüht eventuell schwerwiegende Fehler zu beseitigen. Da es sich aber trotz allem um eine Alpha-Version handelt, kann man davon ausgehen, dass noch genügend unentdeckte Fehler vorhanden sind.
+
Diese Alpha-Version sollte nicht für wirklich kritische Aufgabe verwendet werden! Obwohl unwahrscheinlich, kann Datenverlust nicht ausgeschlossen werden!
Einer der Hauptgründe für diese Alpha-Version ist, das System möglichst vielen Leuten zum Testen anbieten zu können. Nur so ist es möglich, alle Fehler zu finden und Verbesserungsvorschläge zu erhalten. Deshalb sollte nicht gezögert werden, Fehler auch im Bug Tracker zu melden (nachdem man dessen Suchfunktion benutzt hat, um Doppeleinträge zu vermeiden).
We have been working hard to fix all possibly show stopping bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
+
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
We discourage using alpha versions as a production system. Your data could very well be altered, mangled or downright destroyed.
One of the main reasons for releasing an alpha version is to attract more people to test the system and discover bugs or provide suggestions for future enhancements. Please file bugs and enhancements in our bug tracker after using its search function to avoid duplicates.
Hemos trabajado muy duro para arreglar todos los fallos posibles, aún así, siendo una versión alpha, es muy probable que haya muchos por descubrir.
+
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
No se recomienda el uso de versiones alfa como sistemas de producción. Su información bien podría alterarse, estropearse o destruirse en algún momento.
Una de las razones principales para liberar una versión alpha es atraer a mucha gente para probar el sistema y descubrir fallos o darnos sugerencias para futuras mejoras. Por favor, archive los fallos y mejoras en nuestro bug tracker después de utilizar su sistema de búsqueda para evitar duplicados.
Olemme työskennelleet kovasti korjataksemme kaikki mahdolliset esityksen pysäyttävät viat, mutta kuitenkin tämä on ohjelmiston alfa-julkaisu, ja siinä on jäljellä runsaasti löytämättömiä vikoja
+
Olemme työskennelleet kovasti korjataksemme potentiaalisesti kriittiset viat, mutta kuitenkin tämä on ohjelmiston alfa-julkaisu, ja siinä on jäljellä runsaasti löytämättömiä vikoja
Emme suosittele käyttämään alfa-versioita tuotantojärjestelmänä. Tietosi voivat aivan hyvin muuttua, vääristyä tai suorastaan tuhoutua.
Yksi pääsyy alfa-versioiden julkaisemiseen on houkutella lisää ihmisiä järjestelmän testaamiseen ja vikojen havaitsemiseen tai tarjota ehdotuksia tulevista laajennuksista. Ilmoita vioista ja laajennuksista vikaseuraajajärjestelmässämme sen jälkeen kun olet käyttänyt sen etsintätoimintoa kaksoiskappaleilmoitusten estämiseksi.
Nous avons travaillé dur pour résoudre les bogues critiques du système. Néanmoins, Haiku n'étant qu'au stade d'une version alpha, beaucoup n'ont pas encore été découverts. Vous risquez de les rencontrer lors de vos essais.
+
Nous avons travaillé dur pour résoudre les bogues critiques du système. Néanmoins, Haiku n'étant qu'au stade d'une version alpha, beaucoup n'ont pas encore été découverts.
Nous déconseillons l'utilisation des versions Alpha sur un système en production. Les données que vous manipulez pourraient être altérées, corrompues ou tout simplement détruites.
La sortie d'une version alpha a pour objectif de faire découvrir et tester le système par d'avantage de personnes, afin de trouver les bogues présents et d'obtenir des suggestions d'améliorations futures. Veuillez rapporter d'éventuels bogues et suggestions sur notre traqueur de bogues après avoir utilisé sa fonction de recherche pour éviter les doublons.
Abbiamo lavorato duro per risolvere tutti i bug potenzialmente dannosi al fine di usare il sistema ma, essendo questa un'alpha release, è inevitabile che ce ne siano molti altri non ancora scoperti.
+
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
Scoraggiamo l'uso di versioni alpha come sistemi di produzione. I tuoi dati potrebbero venire alterati, danneggiati o essere addirittura cancellati.
Una delle principali ragioni per rilasciare una versione alpha è di attrarre più persone per testare il sistema e scoprire bug o per consigliare miglioramenti. Ti preghiamo di segnalarci bug e miglioramenti nel nostro bug tracker dopo aver usato il suo motore di ricerca interno per evitare duplicati.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our fourth public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
+
Muito obrigado por seu interesse no Haiku! Este é o nosso quarto lançamento ao público. Esperamos atrair novos desenvolvedores para o projeto e dar aos futuros usuários uma oportunidade de experimentar o sistema. Nós entendemos que este lançamento alpha ainda não atende completamente os objetivos que definimos e que não oferece todas as funcionalidades e suavidade de utilização para usuário-final planejadas para a versão R1 final. Contudo, esperamos que este lançamento lhe permita descobrir o grande potencial do Haiku e que você possa compartilhar de nosso entusiasmo.
Visite o site de nosso projeto Haiku-os.org para saber das últimas notícias e comunicados.
Estivemos trabalhado insistentemente para corrigir todos os bugs de travamento que pudessem aparecer, entretanto, por ser uma versão alpha, há margem para a existência de muitos ainda não descobertos.
+
Estivemos trabalhando duro para corrigir bugs potencialmente críticos, entretanto, por ser uma versão alfa, há margem para a existência de muitos ainda não descobertos.
Desencorajamos usar versões alfa como sistemas de produção. Seus dados podem ser seriamente alterados, corrompidos ou completamente destruídos.
Uma das principais razões para lançar uma versão alfa é atrair mais pessoas para testar o sistema e descobrir falhas ou oferecer sugestões para futuras melhorias. Por favor relate erros e melhorias no nosso rastreador de erros somente após usar nossa ferramenta de pesquisa, para evitar duplicidade.
We have been working hard to fix all possibly show stopping bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
+
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
We discourage using alpha versions as a production system. Your data could very well be altered, mangled or downright destroyed.
One of the main reasons for releasing an alpha version is to attract more people to test the system and discover bugs or provide suggestions for future enhancements. Please file bugs and enhancements in our bug tracker after using its search function to avoid duplicates.
Мы провели тяжёлую работу по выявлению и устранению ошибок ("багов"), однако это только альфа-релиз и в нём обязательно присутствует немало скрытых ошибок.
+
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
Мы не рекомендуем использовать альфа-версии в качестве основной операционной системы. В ваши данные с большой вероятностью могут быть внесены нежелательные изменения, они могут быть искажены или даже уничтожены.
Одной из главных причин для выпуска альфа-версии явиляется желание привлечь больше пользователей для тестирования и обнаружения ошибок, а также получения от них предложений по дальнейшему улучшению Haiku. Пожалуйста, оставляйте отчёты о найденных багах и предложения по улучшению в нашей системе отслеживания ошибок (bug tracker), но только после использования поиска, чтобы избежать дубликатов.
Usilovne sme odstraňovali a stále pracujeme na odstraňovaní všetkých závažných chýb, ale pretože toto je alfa vydanie, určite je v ňom ešte mnoho neodhalených chýb.
+
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
Neodporúčame používať alfa verzie ako produkčný systém. Vaše dáta sa môžu zmeniť, poškodiť alebo úplne zničiť.
Jedným z hlavných dôvodov vydania alfa verzie je prilákanie ďalších ľudí, aby otestovali systém a odhalili chyby alebo vyjadrili svoje návrhy ďalších vylepšení. Prosím, posielajte chyby a vylepšenia do nášho systému na sledovanie chýb potom, ako použijete jeho vyhľadávacie funkcie, aby sme predišli duplicitám.
Vi har arbetat hårt för att åtgärda alla möjliga buggar som har kunnat förhindra en utgivning. Men eftersom detta är en alfa utgåva så finns det fog för att det är många oupptäckta buggar kvar.
+
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
Vi rekommenderar inte att använda alfa versioner i ett produktionssystem. Din data kan mycket väl ändras, eller helt enkelt förstöras.
En av huvudanledningarna till varför vi ger ut en alfa-version är för att locka fler att testa systemet, upptäcka buggar eller förse oss med förslag för framtida förbättringar. Vänligen registrera buggar och förbättringar i vårt projekthanteringssystem efter att ha använt dess sökfunktion, för att på så sätt undvika att dubletter skapas.
Ми провели значну роботу по виявленню і усуненню помилок ("багів") , однак це лише альфа-реліз і в ньому можлива присутність деякої кількості невиявлених помилок.
+
We have been working hard to fix potentially critical bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
Ми не рекомендуємо використовувати альфа версій у якості основної опереаційної системи. У Ваші дані з великою ймовірністю можуть бути внесені небажані зміни, вони можуть бути спотворені або навіть знищені.
Одна з основних причин випуску альфа-версії є бажання привернути більше користувачів для тестування і виявлення помилок, а також отримання від них пропозицій для подальшого покращення Haiku. Прохання залишати звіти про найдені помилки і пропозиції з покращення ОС в нашій системі відслідкування помилок (bug tracker) , але тільки після попереднього пошуку, для уникнення появи дублікатів.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our fourth public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
Català
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svenska
日本語
Українська
中文 ［中文］
Português
Suomi
Slovenčina
Magyar
Português (Brazil)
English
+Instal·lació d'aplicacions
Català
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svenska
日本語
Українська
中文 ［中文］
Português
Suomi
Slovenčina
Magyar
Português (Brazil)
English
Monitor d'Activitat
+
BePDF
Gestor d'Arrencada
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Reproductor de CDs
+
CharacterMap
+
Haiku-specific commandline applications
CodyCam
+
Calculadora
+
DiskProbe
DiskUsage
DriveSetup
+
+
+
Expander
Icon-O-Matic
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Installer
+
Magnify
+
Mail
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
MediaPlayer
+
+
+
+
MidiPlayer
+
PackageInstaller
+
+
Pe
People
+
+
+
+
PoorMan
Screenshot
ShowImage
+
+
+
+
+
SoundRecorder
StyledEdit
+
Terminal
+
+
TextSearch
+
+
TV
Vision
WebPositive
+
+
+
+
+
+
WonderBrush
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
LaunchBox
+
NetworkStatus
PowerStatus
+
ProcessController
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Aparença
+
+
+
+
Fons d'Escriptori
+
DataTranslations
+
Barra de l'Escriptori
E-mail
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Tipus de Fitxers
Keyboard
+
Keymap
+
Locale
+
+
Media
Ratolí
+
Xarxa
+
Printers
Screen
+
ScreenSaver
+
+
Sounds
+
Time
+
+
Touchpad
+
+
Tracker
MemòriaVirtual
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
Català
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svenska
日本語
Українська
中文 ［中文］
Português
Suomi
Slovenčina
Magyar
Português (Brazil)
English